SIMATIC HMI HMI device Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
_
_____________
_
_____________
_
_____________
_
_____________
_
_____________
_
_____________
_
_____________
_
_____________
_
_____________
_
_____________
_
_____________
_
_____________
_
_____________
_
_____________
Foreword
Overview 1
Safety instructions and
general notes 2
Planning Use 3
Mounting and Connection 4
Operator elements and
displays 5
Configuring the operating
system 6
Preparing and backing up a
project 7
Operating a project 8
Operating alarms 9
Operating recipes 10
Maintenance and service 11
Specifications 12
Appendix A
Abbreviations B
SIMATIC HMI
HMI device
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions
Edition 07/2005
A5E00457412-01
Order No. 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
Danger
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Notice
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and
operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes
in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and
label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in
connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended
by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and
assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG
Automation and Drives
Postfach 48 48
90437 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Order No.: 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Edition 07/2005
Copyright © Siemens AG 2005.
Technical data subject to change
기기는 업무용(A) 전자파 적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 점을 주의하시기 바라며 가정 외의 지역에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다.
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 i
Foreword
Purpose of the Operating Instructions
This operating instruction manual provides information based on the requirements defined by
DIN 8418 for mechanical engineering documentation. This information relates to the device,
its place of use, transport, storage, installation, use and maintenance.
These operating instructions are intended for:
Users
Commissioning engineers
Service technicians
Maintenance technicians
Please read the section "Safety instructions and general notes" carefully.
The help integrated in WinCC flexible, the WinCC flexible Information System, contains
detailed information. The information system contains instructions, examples and reference
information in electronic form.
Basic Knowledge Requirements
General knowledge of automation technology and process communication is needed to
understand the operating instructions.
It is also assumed that those using the manual have experience in using personal computers
and knowledge of Microsoft operating systems.
Operating Instructions' Range of Validity
The operating instructions apply to the HMI device Mobile Panel 177 in conjunction with the
software package WinCC flexible.
Foreword
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
ii Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Position in the Information Scheme
These operating instructions form part of the SIMATIC HMI documentation. The following
information provides you with an overview of the SIMATIC HMI information landscape:
User manuals
WinCC flexible Micro:
Describes basic principles of configuration using the WinCC flexible Micro Engineering
System.
WinCC flexible Compact/Standard/Advanced:
Describes basic principles of configuration using the WinCC flexible Compact
Engineering System/WinCC flexible Standard/WinCC flexible Advanced.
WinCC flexible Runtime:
Describes how to commission and operate your runtime project on a PC.
WinCC flexible Migration:
Describes how to convert an existing ProTool project to WinCC flexible.
Describes how to convert an existing WinCC project to WinCC flexible.
Describes how to convert an existing ProTool project including a change of the HMI
device, e.g. from OP3 to OP 73 or OP7 to OP 77B.
Describes how to convert an existing ProTool project including a change from a
graphics device to a Windows CE device.
Communication:
Communication Part 1 describes the connection of the HMI device to SIMATIC PLCs.
Communication Part 2 describes the connection of the HMI device to third-party
PLCs.
Operating Instructions
Operating instructions for SIMATIC HMI devices:
OP 73, OP 77A, OP 77B
TP 170micro, TP 170A, TP 170B, OP 170B
OP 73micro, TP 177micro
TP 177A, TP 177B, OP 177B
TP 270, OP 270
MP 270B
MP 370
Operating instructions for mobile SIMATIC HMI devices:
Mobile Panel 170
Mobile Panel 177
Operating instructions (compact) for SIMATIC HMI devices:
OP 77B
Mobile Panel 170
Mobile Panel 177
Foreword
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 iii
Getting Started
WinCC flexible for first time users:
Based on an example project, this is a step-by-step introduction to the basics of
configuring screens, alarms, recipes and screen navigation.
WinCC flexible for advanced users:
Based on an example project, this is a step-by-step introduction to the basics of
configuring logs, project reports, scripts, user management and multilingual projects and
integration in STEP 7.
WinCC flexible options:
Based on an example project, this is a step-by-step introduction to the basics of
configuring the WinCC flexible Sm@rtServices, Sm@rtAccess and OPC Server options.
Online Availability
Technical documentation on SIMATIC products and SIMATIC systems is available in PDF
format in various languages at the following addresses:
SIMATIC Guide Technische Dokumentation in Deutsch:
"http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic/portal/html_00/techdoku.htm"
SIMATIC Guide for Technical Documentation in English:
"http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic/portal/html_76/techdoku.htm"
Conventions
Configuration and runtime software differ with regard to their names as follows:
"WinCC flexible 2005," for example, refers to the configuration software.
The term "WinCC flexible" is used in a general context. The full name, for example
"WinCC flexible 2005", is always used when it is necessary to differentiate between
different versions of the configuration software.
"WinCC flexible Runtime" refers to the runtime software that can run on HMI devices.
Text is highlighted as follows to simplify reading the operating instructions:
Representational Form Scope
"Add screen" Terminology that appears in the user interface, e.g., dialog
names, tabs, buttons, menu entries
Inputs required, e.g., limit values, tag values
Path information
"File > Edit" Operational sequences, e.g., menu commands, context menu
commands
<F1>, <Alt+P> Keyboard operation
Please observe notes labeled as follows:
Note
Notes contain important information concerning the product, its use or a specific section of
the documentation to which you should pay particular attention.
Foreword
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
iv Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Trademarks
Names labeled with a ® symbol are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. Other names
used in this documentation may be trademarks, the use of which by third parties for their
own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
HMI®
SIMATIC®
SIMATIC HMI®
SIMATIC ProTool®
SIMATIC WinCC®
SIMATIC WinCC flexible®
SIMATIC Mobile Panel 177®
Representatives and offices
If you have any further questions relating to the products described in this manual, please
contact your local representative at the SIEMENS branch nearest you.
You can locate your contact partner on this Internet URL:
"http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner"
Training Center
Siemens AG offers a variety of training courses in order to familiarize you with automation
systems. Please contact your regional Training Center, or the central Training Center in
D90327 Nuremberg.
Phone: +49 (911) 895-3200
Internet: "http://www.sitrain.com"
Technical Support
You can reach the Technical Support for all A&D products
using the support request form on the web:
"http://www.siemens.de/automation/support-request"
Phone: + 49 180 5050 222
Fax: + 49 180 5050 223
Further information about our technical support is available on the Internet at
"http://www.siemens.com/automation/service"
Foreword
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 v
Service & Support on the Internet
Service & Support provides additional comprehensive information on SIMATIC products
through online services at "http://www.siemens.de/automation/support":
The newsletter provides up-to-date information relating to your products.
Our Service & Support search engine provides you access to all available documentation.
A forum for global exchange of information by users and experts
Current product information, FAQs and downloads
Your local Automation & Drives representative
Information about on-site services, repairs, spare parts and much more is available on
our "Services" pages.
Foreword
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
vi Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 1-1
Table of contents
Foreword .....................................................................................................................................................i
1 Overview................................................................................................................................................. 1-7
1.1 Product Overview....................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.2 Design of the HMI Device .......................................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.2 Mobile Panel 177 ....................................................................................................................... 1-9
1.2.3 Terminal box ............................................................................................................................ 1-12
1.2.4 Connecting cables ................................................................................................................... 1-14
1.2.5 Wall holder ............................................................................................................................... 1-16
1.3 Accessories.............................................................................................................................. 1-16
1.3.1 Memory card ............................................................................................................................ 1-16
1.3.2 Miscellaneous .......................................................................................................................... 1-17
1.3.3 Optional Accumulator Package................................................................................................ 1-17
1.4 Range of HMI software functions............................................................................................. 1-18
1.5 Communication ........................................................................................................................ 1-20
2 Safety instructions and general notes..................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Safety information ...................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Standards and Approvals........................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 Operating safety......................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.4 Voltage supply............................................................................................................................ 2-6
2.5 Notes on applications................................................................................................................. 2-6
2.6 Risk analysis .............................................................................................................................. 2-6
2.7 Enable switch............................................................................................................................. 2-7
2.8 STOP button .............................................................................................................................. 2-8
2.9 Electromagnetic compatibility .................................................................................................... 2-9
2.10 Transport and storage conditions ............................................................................................ 2-11
3 Planning Use .......................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Notes about Usage .................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Mounting positions and type of fixation...................................................................................... 3-4
3.3 Preparing mounting.................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.4 Specifications for Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of Protection........................ 3-6
3.5 Nominal Voltages....................................................................................................................... 3-6
4 Mounting and Connection....................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Checking the package contents................................................................................................. 4-1
Table of contents
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
1-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
4.2 Mounting the terminal box and wall holder ................................................................................ 4-1
4.3 Electrical installation................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.4 Connecting the terminal box ...................................................................................................... 4-3
4.4.1 Opening and closing the terminal box........................................................................................ 4-4
4.4.2 Interfaces to the Terminal Box DP ............................................................................................. 4-6
4.4.3 Interfaces to the Terminal Box PN ............................................................................................. 4-7
4.4.4 Setting the box ID at the terminal box........................................................................................ 4-8
4.4.5 Stripping the insulation of cables ............................................................................................... 4-9
4.4.6 Connecting the Equipotential Bonding Circuit.......................................................................... 4-10
4.4.7 Connecting the configuration computer ................................................................................... 4-11
4.4.8 Connecting the PLC................................................................................................................. 4-13
4.4.9 Connect a printer...................................................................................................................... 4-16
4.4.10 Connecting the Power Supply.................................................................................................. 4-17
4.4.11 Connecting the connecting cable............................................................................................. 4-19
4.5 Connecting Mobile Panel 177 .................................................................................................. 4-21
4.5.1 Opening and closing the terminal compartment ...................................................................... 4-21
4.5.2 Interfaces on the Mobile Panel 177 DP ................................................................................... 4-23
4.5.3 Interfaces on Mobile Panel 177 PN ......................................................................................... 4-23
4.5.4 Connecting the configuration computer ................................................................................... 4-24
4.6 Switching on and testing the HMI device................................................................................. 4-25
5 Operator elements and displays ............................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1 Mobile Panel .............................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1 Operator control elements.......................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 Front-side operator control elements......................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.3 Enable switch ............................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.1.4 STOP button .............................................................................................................................. 5-5
5.1.4.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.1.4.2 Safety functions of the STOP button.......................................................................................... 5-7
5.1.4.3 STOP button on Terminal Box Plus ........................................................................................... 5-8
5.1.4.4 STOP button on Terminal Box Basic ......................................................................................... 5-9
5.1.5 Hand wheel .............................................................................................................................. 5-11
5.1.6 Key-operated switch................................................................................................................. 5-12
5.1.7 Illuminated pushbutton............................................................................................................. 5-13
5.2 Holding and placing the Mobile Panel...................................................................................... 5-14
5.3 Terminal Box PN ...................................................................................................................... 5-16
6 Configuring the operating system ........................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Control Panel ............................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.2.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.2 Entry using the screen keyboard ............................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.3 Configuring the screen keyboard ............................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.4 Setting the character repetition of the screen keyboard ............................................................ 6-8
6.2.5 Setting the double-click on the touch screen .............................................................................6-9
6.2.6 Backup and restore using a memory card ............................................................................... 6-10
6.2.7 Setting the date and time ......................................................................................................... 6-13
6.2.8 Saving tab entries .................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.2.9 Modifying the screen contrast .................................................................................................. 6-16
6.2.10 Displaying information about the HMI...................................................................................... 6-17
6.2.11 Calibrating the touch screen .................................................................................................... 6-18
6.2.12 Changing the password properties .......................................................................................... 6-20
Table of contents
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 1-3
6.2.13 Changing the printer properties ............................................................................................... 6-21
6.2.14 Changing regional settings ...................................................................................................... 6-23
6.2.15 Changing MPI/DP settings – only at Mobile Panel 177 DP ..................................................... 6-24
6.2.16 Setting the delay ...................................................................................................................... 6-27
6.2.17 Setting the screen saver .......................................................................................................... 6-28
6.2.18 Displaying the system information ........................................................................................... 6-29
6.2.19 Configuring the data channel................................................................................................... 6-31
6.2.20 Configuring network operation ................................................................................................. 6-33
6.2.20.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 6-33
6.2.20.2 Setting the computer name of the HMI device......................................................................... 6-35
6.2.20.3 Activating the direct connection ............................................................................................... 6-36
6.2.20.4 Changing the network configuration ........................................................................................ 6-37
6.2.20.5 Changing the logon data.......................................................................................................... 6-39
6.2.20.6 Changing the internet settings – only at Mobile Panel 177 PN................................................ 6-40
7 Preparing and backing up a project ........................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 Setting the operating mode........................................................................................................ 7-2
7.1.2 Reusing existing projects ........................................................................................................... 7-3
7.1.3 Data transmission options.......................................................................................................... 7-4
7.2 Transfer...................................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.2 Starting the transfer manually.................................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.3 Starting the transfer automatically ............................................................................................. 7-6
7.2.4 Testing a project ........................................................................................................................ 7-7
7.3 Backup and restore.................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.3.2 Backup and restore operations in WinCC flexible ................................................................... 7-10
7.3.3 Backup and restore operations using ProSave ....................................................................... 7-12
7.4 Updating the operating system ................................................................................................ 7-14
7.4.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 7-14
7.4.2 Updating the Operating System Using WinCC flexible............................................................ 7-15
7.4.3 Updating the operating system in ProSave ............................................................................. 7-16
7.5 Installing and uninstalling options ............................................................................................ 7-17
7.5.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 7-17
7.5.2 Installing and uninstalling options via WinCC flexible.............................................................. 7-17
7.5.3 Installing and uninstalling options via ProSave........................................................................ 7-19
7.6 Transferring license keys in both directions............................................................................. 7-20
7.6.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 7-20
7.6.2 Transfering License Keys and Transfering Them Back........................................................... 7-20
8 Operating a project ................................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Key operation............................................................................................................................. 8-3
8.3 Direct keys ................................................................................................................................. 8-4
8.4 Setting the project language ...................................................................................................... 8-5
8.5 Entries and help within a project................................................................................................ 8-6
8.5.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.5.2 Entering and editing numerical values....................................................................................... 8-7
8.5.3 Entering and editing alphanumerical values.............................................................................. 8-9
8.5.4 Entering and editing symbolic values ...................................................................................... 8-11
Table of contents
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
1-4 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
8.5.5 Entering the date and time....................................................................................................... 8-11
8.5.6 Operating switches................................................................................................................... 8-12
8.5.7 Operating sliding controllers .................................................................................................... 8-13
8.5.8 Displaying infotext .................................................................................................................... 8-14
8.6 Status / control ......................................................................................................................... 8-15
8.7 Pointer instrument.................................................................................................................... 8-17
8.8 Sm@rtClient view..................................................................................................................... 8-18
8.9 Operating trends ...................................................................................................................... 8-20
8.9.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 8-20
8.9.2 Operating the trend display...................................................................................................... 8-21
8.10 Project security......................................................................................................................... 8-22
8.10.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 8-22
8.10.2 User login ................................................................................................................................. 8-24
8.10.3 User logoff................................................................................................................................ 8-25
8.10.4 Creating a user......................................................................................................................... 8-26
8.10.5 Changing user data.................................................................................................................. 8-27
8.10.6 Deleting a user ......................................................................................................................... 8-29
8.11 Closing the project ................................................................................................................... 8-31
9 Operating alarms .................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Displaying alarms....................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.3 Acknowledge alarm.................................................................................................................... 9-5
9.4 Edit alarm ................................................................................................................................... 9-6
10 Operating recipes ................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1 Purpose of and applications for recipes................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Structure of a recipe................................................................................................................. 10-2
10.3 Display recipes......................................................................................................................... 10-4
10.4 Operating recipe handling........................................................................................................ 10-7
10.4.1 Operating the recipe view ........................................................................................................ 10-7
10.4.2 Operator input in the overview ................................................................................................. 10-9
10.4.3 Creating recipe records.......................................................................................................... 10-10
10.4.4 Editing a recipe data record ................................................................................................... 10-11
10.4.5 Delete recipe data record....................................................................................................... 10-12
10.4.6 Export recipe data record....................................................................................................... 10-13
10.4.7 Import recipe records ............................................................................................................. 10-13
10.4.8 Synchronizing tags................................................................................................................. 10-14
10.5 Using recipes ......................................................................................................................... 10-15
10.5.1 Configuring the transfer of recipe data records ..................................................................... 10-15
10.5.2 Reading a recipe data record from the PLC .......................................................................... 10-17
10.5.3 Transferring a recipe record to the PLC................................................................................. 10-18
10.6 Displaying production sequences schematically ................................................................... 10-19
10.6.1 Entering a recipe data record................................................................................................. 10-19
10.6.2 Manual production sequence................................................................................................. 10-20
10.6.3 Automatic production sequence............................................................................................. 10-21
11 Maintenance and service...................................................................................................................... 11-1
Table of contents
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 1-5
11.1 Maintenance and upkeep......................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Servicing and spare parts ........................................................................................................ 11-2
12 Specifications ....................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1 Dimensional Drawings ............................................................................................................. 12-1
12.1.1 Mobile Panel ............................................................................................................................ 12-1
12.1.2 Wall holder ............................................................................................................................... 12-3
12.1.3 Terminal Box DP...................................................................................................................... 12-4
12.1.4 Terminal Box PN...................................................................................................................... 12-5
12.2 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................... 12-6
12.2.1 Mobile Panel ............................................................................................................................ 12-6
12.2.2 Terminal Box DP...................................................................................................................... 12-7
12.2.3 Terminal Box PN...................................................................................................................... 12-8
12.3 Interface allocation Mobile Panel 177 DP................................................................................ 12-9
12.3.1 RS 485 (IF 2)............................................................................................................................ 12-9
12.3.2 RJ45......................................................................................................................................... 12-9
12.3.3 Female header....................................................................................................................... 12-10
12.4 Interface assignment Mobile Panel 177 PN........................................................................... 12-10
12.4.1 RS 485 (IF 2).......................................................................................................................... 12-10
12.4.2 RJ45....................................................................................................................................... 12-11
12.4.3 Female header....................................................................................................................... 12-11
12.5 Interface assignment Terminal Box DP ................................................................................. 12-12
12.6 Interface assignment Terminal Box PN ................................................................................. 12-15
12.7 Connection examples for Enable switch and STOP button................................................... 12-18
A Appendix.................................................................................................................................................A-1
A.1 Connection point recognition .....................................................................................................A-1
A.1.1 Function method ........................................................................................................................A-1
A.1.2 Connection point recognition via box ID ....................................................................................A-2
A.2 Evaluation of the operator control elements ..............................................................................A-4
A.2.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................A-4
A.2.2 Evaluating operator control elements as direct keys .................................................................A-5
A.2.3 Evaluating operator control elements via WinCC flexible system functions..............................A-8
A.2.3.1 LED control of the softkeys ........................................................................................................A-8
A.2.3.2 Basic procedure ......................................................................................................................... A-9
A.2.3.3 Illuminated pushbutton.............................................................................................................A-12
A.2.3.4 Key-operated switch ................................................................................................................A-13
A.2.3.5 Handwheel ...............................................................................................................................A-13
A.3 ESD Guidelines........................................................................................................................A-14
A.4 System alarms .........................................................................................................................A-16
B Abbreviations..........................................................................................................................................B-1
Glossary ..................................................................................................................................... Glossary-1
Index
Table of contents
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
1-6 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 1-1
Overview 1
1.1 1.1 Product Overview
Extended possible applications – with the Mobile Panel 177
The Mobile Panel 177 represents a further development step in the well-known mobile HMI
devices of the "170" series. With the Mobile Panel 177 you can utilize text- or graphics-
based projects for simple and medium-sized control and monitoring tasks on machines and
plants.
SIMATIC Mobile Panels offer the option of making safety functions available on a mobile
basis at any point of a machine or plant. In addition, the Mobile Panel 177 disposes of
interfaces for connection to PROFIBUS or Ethernet – depending on the specific
characteristics.
The Mobile Panel 177 is characterized by short start-up times, large user memory and high
performance and is optimized for projects based on WinCC flexible.
Overview
1.2 Design of the HMI Device
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
1-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
1.2 1.2 Design of the HMI Device
1.2.1 Overview
Design
The following figure shows the Mobile Panel 177 with a terminal box. For stationary
operation, the Mobile Panel 177 can be securely placed in a wall holder (not shown).
Figure 1-1 Mobile Panel design, example Mobile Panel 177 DP
Mobile Panel 177 DP
Terminal Box DP
Connecting cable DP
Cable for power supply and safety functions
Cable for process connection
Cables for process connection are available in different lengths and must be purchased
separately.
Cables for the power supply and safety functions must be selected specifically for the
system.
Overview
1.2 Design of the HMI Device
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 1-3
1.2.2 Mobile Panel 177
Introduction
The Mobile Panel 177 comes equipped in the following three ways:
With enabling switches
With enabling switches and STOP button
With enabling switches, STOP button, handwheel, key-operated switch, and illuminated
pushbutton
This variant is shown in the following illustrations.
Views of the Mobile Panel 177
Figure 1-2 Front view
STOP button, optional
Control keys
Display / Touch screen
Key-operated switch, optional
Handwheel, optional
Illuminated pushbutton, optional
Overview
1.2 Design of the HMI Device
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
1-4 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Figure 1-3 Side view
Fall protection for the STOP pushbutton
STOP button, optional
Enabling switches, located on both sides of the Mobile Panel 177
Grip
Figure 1-4 Rear view with opened terminal compartment on Mobile Panel 177 DP
Grip
Terminal compartment
Slot for MultiMediaCard
Sealing plug, to guarantee maintenance of protection class IP65
Overview
1.2 Design of the HMI Device
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 1-5
Figure 1-5 Rear view with opened terminal compartment on Mobile Panel 177 PN
Grip
Terminal compartment
Slot for MultiMediaCard
Sealing plug, to guarantee maintenance of protection class IP65
Overview
1.2 Design of the HMI Device
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
1-6 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
1.2.3 Terminal box
Design
Figure 1-6 Terminal Box DP
Screwed joint for process data line
Screwed joint for power supply cable and shield
Screwed joint for cable with supplementary Stop and enabling switch signals and for PLC-
accompanying signals
Connecting socket for the connecting cable
Dummy cap
Figure 1-7 Terminal Box PN
Screwed joint for process data line
LED displays
Screwed joint for power supply cable and shield
Screwed joint for cable with supplementary Stop and enabling switch signals and for PLC-
accompanying signals
Connecting socket for the connecting cable – covered with dummy cap
Overview
1.2 Design of the HMI Device
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 1-7
Notice
Protection class IP65
Protection class IP65 at the terminal box is ensured with plugged-in Mobile Panel 177 or
plugged-in dummy cap.
Variants
The terminal boxes are available in the following variants:
Terminal Box Basic
Terminal Box Plus
The two types of terminal boxes differ in the manner in which the circuit evaluates the Stop
Circuit or Emergency Stop signal of the system to be monitored and the corresponding
response to the system itself that is being monitored.
Note
The exterior of the terminal box variants differ only in the printing on the side.
Note
Recovery time
Wait for approx. one second after you have removed the connecting cable from the terminal
box before you plug the connecting cable back in.
After power failures of less than one second the connecting cable has to be disconnected.
Division of the system into zones
You can divide a system into several zones or functional areas by using several terminal
boxes, whereby the safety functions can also be set up to be zone-specific. This means that
both enabling switches and STOP buttons can act in only one particular zone and not in
others.
Connection point recognition
You can set an individual box ID for each terminal box. The box ID allows connection point
recognition to be implemented.
Combination of connecting cable and terminal box
It is ensured by mechanical means that only the following combinations can be plugged:
Mobile Panel 177 DP with connecting cable DP to the terminal box DP
Mobile Panel 177 PN with connecting cable PN to the terminal box PN
Compatibility with the Mobile Panel 170
You can operate a Mobile Panel 170 on a terminal box DP for the Mobile Panel 177 DP. The
additional features of the new terminal box, for example the box ID, cannot be used with the
Mobile Panel 170.
You can operate a Mobile Panel 177 DP on a terminal box for the Mobile Panel 170.
Overview
1.2 Design of the HMI Device
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
1-8 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
1.2.4 Connecting cables
Introduction
The connecting cable is connected to the Mobile Panel 177 and is plugged with a quick-
connect plug connector to the terminal box. The connecting cable is an industrial cable and,
thus, resistant to many solvents and lubricants. The flexural strength of the connecting cable
is geared to the actual usage conditions.
The connecting cable is available in two models:
Connecting cable DP
For connecting the Mobile Panel 177 DP to the terminal box DP.
Connecting cable PN
For connecting the Mobile Panel 177 PN to the terminal box PN.
The connecting cables are available in different lengths. Further information can be found in
the Siemens ST 80 catalog.
Overview
1.2 Design of the HMI Device
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 1-9
Design of the connecting cable
Figure 1-8 Connecting cable DP
Figure 1-9 Connecting cable PN
Metallic push-pull circular connector
Strain relief and kink protection for connecting cable
RJ45 plug
Plug connector
Connections on the Mobile Panel 177 DP
RJ45, 8-pin
Plug connector, 10-pin
Connections on the Mobile Panel 177 PN:
RJ45, 8-pin
Plug connector, 12-pin
Connections on the terminal box side:
Metallic push-pull circular connector, 22-pin
Note
Protection class
When inserted, the circular connector guarantees the rating of protection class IP65.
Overview
1.3 Accessories
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
1-10 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
1.2.5 Wall holder
Function
The wall holder is used to securely mount the Mobile Panel 177 for stationary operation.
Figure 1-10 Wall holder
Hook for the grip on the HMI device
Screw-on hole
1.3 1.3 Accessories
1.3.1 Memory card
MultiMediaCard
A MultiMediaCard that has been tested and approved by Siemens AG can be used as an
external storage medium for the Mobile Panel 177. You can order a tested and approved
MultiMediaCard from a Siemens representative or Siemens office. The order number for the
MultiMediaCard is 6AV6671-1CB00-0AX0.
Notice
MultiMediaCard
The MultiMediaCard of the SIMATIC S7 controller cannot be used.
Overview
1.3 Accessories
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 1-11
1.3.2 Miscellaneous
Protective sleeve
To protect your customized keyboard labeling on the Mobile Panel 177, protective sleeves
are available for the labeling strips. The order number for the protective sleeves is
6AV6574-1AB04-4AA0. The set contains five protective sleeves.
Protective film
Protective films are available for the touch screen. The protective film prevents the touch
screen from being scratched or soiled. The order number for the protective films is
6AV6574-1AD04-4AA0. The set contains ten protective films.
PC-PPI adapter
For conversion from RS 232 to RS 485, order the PC-PPI adapter,
Order No. 6ES7 901- 3CB30-0XA0, from Siemens AG. You need the PC-PPI adapter, for
example, to update the operating system bymeans of bootstrap. Moreover, you can use the
PC-PPI adapter for transferring.
1.3.3 Optional Accumulator Package
Purpose
The optional accumulator package allows you to reduce the booting time of the Mobile Panel
when changing from one terminal box to another.
The maximum stored energy time amounts to 10 minutes, after which the Mobile Panel is
switched off.
The accumulator is charged automatically when the Mobile Panel is connected to a terminal
box.
Notice
Recharging and discharging the accumulator
Polarity reversal and short-circuiting while improperly recharging and discharging the
accumulator can lead to a risk of fire and even, in extreme cases, explosion. The
accumulator can only be recharged in the Mobile Panel.
Note
The same system messages as during faulty communication can be output on the HMI
device while the HMI device is being plugged to a different terminal.
Note
You cannot use the optional accumulator package with Mobile Panel 170.
Overview
1.4 Range of HMI software functions
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
1-12 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Safety information
The accumulator is a Li-ion accumulator. The following safety notes apply for these
accumulators:
Do not crush
Do not heat or burn
Do not short-circuit
Do not take apart
Keep out of liquids – the accumulator may crack or burst
1.4 1.4 Range of HMI software functions
General
The following tables show the objects which can be integrated in a project for a
Mobile Panel 177.
Alarms
Object Specification Mobile Panel 177
Number of discrete alarms 2000
Number of analog alarms 50
Length of the alarm text 80 characters
Number of tags in an alarm Max. 8
Display Alarm view, alarm window
Acknowledge single error alarms Yes
Acknowledge several error alarms simultaneously
(group acknowledgement)
16 acknowledgment
groups
Edit alarm Yes
Alarm
Alarm indicator Yes
Alarm buffer capacity 256 alarms
Simultaneously queued alarm events Max. 64
View alarm Yes
Alarm buffer, retentive
Delete alarm buffer Yes
Tags, values and lists
Object Specification Mobile Panel 177
Tag Number 1000
Limit-value monitoring Input/Output Yes
Linear scaling Input/Output Yes
Text List Number 300
Overview
1.4 Range of HMI software functions
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 1-13
Screens
Object Specification Mobile Panel 177
Number 500
Fields per screen 50
Tags per screen 50
Complex objects per screen (e.g. bars) 5
Screen
Template Yes
Recipes
Object Specification Mobile Panel 177
Number 100
Data records per recipe 200
Recipe
Entries per recipe 200
Infotext
Object Specification Mobile Panel 177
Length (no. of characters) 320 characters
For alarms Yes
For screens Yes
Infotext
For screen objects (for example IO fields) Yes
Additional functions
Object Specification Mobile Panel 177
Monitor settings Touch screen calibration
Setting the contrast
Yes
Yes
Language change Number of languages 16
Graphic object Vector and pixel graphics Yes
Graphs Number 50
Task planner Number of tasks 10
Text object Number 2500
Security Number of users 50
Overview
1.5 Communication
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
1-14 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
1.5 1.5 Communication
Number of connections
Connection Mobile Panel 177 DP Mobile Panel 177 PN
Number using a point-to-point connection 1
Number using a bus connection 4 on the same bus
Siemens PLCs
The following table lists the Siemens PLCs that can be used with the Mobile Panel 177 and
allocates the protocols and profiles that can be used.
Controller Protocol/Profile Mobile Panel 177
DP
Mobile Panel 177
PN
SIMATIC S7-300/400 MPI
PROFIBUS DP up to 12 Mbps
PROFINET
Standard S7 via TCP/IP
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
SIMATIC S7-200 PPI
MPI
PROFIBUS DP (DP-T)
Standard S7 via TCP/IP
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
SIMATIC S5 AS 511 via RS 232/TTY adapter
1)
PROFIBUS DP up to 12 Mbps
Yes
Yes
No
No
SIMATIC 505 NITP
PROFIBUS DP up to 12 Mbps
Yes
Yes
No
No
1) The converter 6ES5 734-1BD20 is optional
Overview
1.5 Communication
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 1-15
PLCs from other manufacturers
The following table lists the controllers of other manufacturers that can be used with the
Mobile Panel 177 and allocates the protocols and profiles that can be used.
Controller Protocol for
Mobile Panel 177 DP
Protocol for
Mobile Panel 177 PN
Allen-Bradley
PLC series:
SLC500, SLC501, SLC502
PLC series:
SLC503, SLC504, SLC505, MicroLogix
DH485 via DF1-Gateway
DH485
DH485 via DF1-Gateway
DH485
DF1
DH+ via DF1-Gateway
No or via HTTP protocol
Allen-Bradley
PLC series PLC5/20
DF11)
DH+ using DF1-Gateway
No or via HTTP protocol
GE Fanuc Automation
PLC series 90-30, 90-70, 90-Micro
SNP No or via HTTP protocol
LG Industrial Systems (Lucky
Goldstar)/IMO
PLC series GLOFA-GM/G4, G6, G7M
Dedicated communication No or via HTTP protocol
Mitsubishi Electric
PLC series MELSEC FX, MELSEC FX0
FX No or via HTTP protocol
Mitsubishi Melsec
PLC series FX, A, Ans, Q, QnAS
Protocol 4 No or via HTTP protocol
OMRON
PLC series SYSMAC C, SYSMAC CV,
SYSMAC CS1, SYSMAC alpha, CP
Hostlink/Multilink (SYSMAC
Way)
No or via HTTP protocol
Schneider Automation (Modicon)
PLC series Modicon 984, TSX Quantum,
TSX Compact
Modicon Modbus No or via HTTP protocol
Overview
1.5 Communication
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
1-16 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 2-1
Safety instructions and general notes 2
2.1 2.1 Safety information
Safety regulations
Warning
Strictly observe all instructions in these operating instructions at all times. Otherwise,
hazardous situations can arise or the safety mechanisms in the HMI device can be rendered
ineffective.
Observe the safety and accident prevention instructions applicable to your application in
addition to the safety instructions given in this manual.
Warning
The configuring engineer for a machine or system controller must take precautions so that
an interrupted program can be restarted normally after a voltage dips or power failures.
Dangerous operating conditions must not occur, even temporarily.
If faults in the system may cause bodily injury or significant property damage, additional
measures must be taken outside of the system. These measures must also ensure safe
operating conditions in the system in the event of a fault.
The configuring engineer for the system must take precautions to ensure that only
authorized personnel can make changes to the memory that could result in a hazardous
situation.
The STOP button must be checked periodically for proper functioning.
Warning
Following a heavy shock to the HMI device, e.g., the device was dropped, check the safety-
relevant parts for proper functioning.
Manual actions performed with the HMI device may only occur in conjunction with the
enabling switches and at reduced velocity.
If the system is operated with the HMI device, ensure that operation during this time is only
possible via the HMI device and not from any other point of the system.
Safety instructions and general notes
2.2 Standards and Approvals
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
2-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
High frequency radiation
Notice
Unintentional operating situations
High frequency radiation, from mobile phones for example, can cause unintentional
operating situations.
2.2 2.2 Standards and Approvals
Valid approvals
Caution
Valid approvals
The overview below provides information on availableapprovals
The only valid approvals for the HMI device and the terminal box itself are those shown on
the label on the rear panel.
CE approval
The HMI device and the terminal box meet the general and safety-related requirements of
the following EC directives and conform to the harmonized European standards (EN) for
programmable logic controllers published in the official gazettes of the European Union:
89/336/EEC ”Electromagnetic Compatibility” (EMC Directive)
98/37/EG Directive of the European Parliament and Council of 22 June 1998 on the
approximation of the laws and administrative regulations of the Member States
concerning machinery
EC declaration of conformity
The EC declarations of conformity are kept available for the responsible authorities at the
following address:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Automation & Drives
A&D AS RD ST PLC
PO Box 1963
D-92209 Amberg
Safety instructions and general notes
2.2 Standards and Approvals
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 2-3
UL approval
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. conforming to
UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
CSA C22.2 No. 142, (Process Control Equipment)
or
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. conforming to
UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
CSA C22.2 No. 142, (Process Control Equipment)
UL 1604 (Hazardous Location)
CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)
Approved for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4
FM approval
FM
APPROVED
Factory Mutual Research (FM) conforming to
Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810
Approved for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D T4
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC T4
Ex approval
In compliance with EN 50021 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres;
Type of protection "n")
II 3 G/D EEx nA II T4
IP65
04 ATEX 1297X
Safety instructions and general notes
2.2 Standards and Approvals
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
2-4 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Label for Australia
N117
The HMI device and the terminal box fulfill the requirements of standard AS/NZS 2064
(Class A).
SIBE Switzerland Certification Service
The HMI device and the terminal box fulfil Safety Category 3 in accordance with EN 954-1.
The safety function enabling device for special operation control and the STOP button fulfil
Safety Category 3 in accordance with EN 954-1 and the requirements of EN 60204-1, in as
far as the safety instructions in the operating instructions are observed.
IEC 61131
The HMI device fulfills the requirements and criteria conforming to IEC 61131-2,
Programmable Logic Controllers, Part 2: Operating resource requirements and tests.
Safety instructions and general notes
2.3 Operating safety
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 2-5
2.3 2.3 Operating safety
Standards
The HMI device complies with the following standards:
EN 60204-1
Safety of Machinery – Electrical Equipment of Machines
EN 61131-1 and EN 61131-2
Programmable Logic Controllers
The HMI device was tested for EMC in accordance with the following standards:
EN 50081-2, EMC – Emitted Interference
EN 61000-6-2, Generic standard, Immunity, industrial environments
IEC 61131-2, Draft 10.03.02, Programmable logic controllers
STOP button for fast machine stops:
EN 60947-5-1:1997, K 2.2, Low-voltage Switchgear and Control Gear, Positive-Opening
Contacts
EN 954 Category 3 can be achieved with an external monitoring device. Two floating
break contacts for connection of external I/O, rated voltage of 24 V (safety extra-low
voltage in accordance with EN 61131-2 or EN 50179, Equipment of Electrical Power
Installations with Electronic Devices), maximum current of 500 mA
Enabling equipment in accordance with EN 60204-1 in safety categories defined in
EN 954-1:1996, Safety-Related Parts of Control Systems:
EN 954 Category 3 can be achieved with an external monitoring device.
2 parallel switched floating make contacts for connection of external I/O, rated
voltage of 24 VDC (safety extra-low voltage in accordance with EN 61131-2 or
EN 50178), maximum current of 400 mA.
If the HMI device is used in a system, the following standards are fulfilled:
prEN 1921, Industrial Automation Systems – Safety of Integrated Manufacturing Systems
EN 12417:2001, Machine Tools – Safety - Machining Centers
UL 508, Industrial Control Equipment
CSA C22.2 No.14, Industrial Control Equipment
Safety instructions and general notes
2.4 Voltage supply
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
2-6 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
2.4 2.4 Voltage supply
Safety specifications
Warning
The HMI device conforms to protection class III in accordance with EN 61131-2 or
EN 50178. The 24 VDC supply must be ensured by safe separation of extra low voltage from
dangerous contact voltages, e.g., using a safety isolation transformer or equivalent devices.
The supply circuit must be protected against short circuits with a 3.15 A fuse.
Therefore, when sizing the supply, you must pay attention to the voltage drop on the
connecting cable.
2.5 2.5 Notes on applications
Use in an industrial environment
The HMI device is designed for industrial use. The following standards are met:
Requirements in terms of the emission of interference EN 61000-6-4: 2001
Requirements in terms of noise immunity EN 61000-6-2: 2001
Use in residential areas
If the HMI device is used in a residential area, you must take measures to achieve Limit
Class B conforming to EN 55011 for RF interference.
A suitable measure to achieve Limit Class B for suppression of radio interference is, for
example:
Use of filters in electrical supply lines
2.6 2.6 Risk analysis
Carrying out a risk analysis
The following standards must be used to perform the risk analysis:
EN 292, General Machinery Directives
EN 1050 Risk Assessment for Machinery
EN 954-1 Safety of Machinery
These considerations lead to a safety category (B, 1, 2, 3, 4) in accordance with EN 954-1
that ultimately dictates how the safety-related aspects of the system to be monitored are to
be furnished.
The connection examples with three different monitoring devices show how Category 3 in
accordance with EN 954-1 can be achieved with the safety-related features of the Mobile
Panel 177. Attention must be paid that the overall concept of the system is designed with this
in mind.
Safety instructions and general notes
2.7 Enable switch
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 2-7
2.7 2.7 Enable switch
Introduction
Enabling equipment consists of the enabling switches positioned on both sides of the Mobile
Panel 177.
Numerically controlled machines and systems are equpped with the operating modes
"Automatic mode" and "Special operation".
Safety is ensured in automatic mode by means of closed, isolating protective devices and/or
with functional non-isolating protective devices that block access.
In special operation the safety has to be ensured in a different manner than in automatic
mode. In special operation mode the danger zones of the machine or system are entered,
where controlled movements have to be possible.
Special operation
A reduced speed on the machine or in the system has to be specified for special operation
based on the risk assessment. An action must be possible only when the enabling
equipment is activated. The operator must have the necessary qualifications and be
acquainted with the details of the intended application.
Safety information
The safety-related aspects of the velocity reduction control and those for the enabling
equipment are designed in such a way that they satisfy the EN 954-1 safety category
determined by the risk analysis.
Safety Category 3 in accordance with EN 954-1:1996 can be achieved by implementing
enabling equipment with two circuits. The draft C standard for machine tools notes the
following:
"Enabling equipment can either be a 2-position command device in conjunction with a Stop
device or a 3-position command device. The 3-position command device is preferable."
The operating principles of enabling equipment are described in EN 60204. Through the
findings from accident investigations and the existence of technical solutions, the 3-stage
enabling switch became state of the art. Positions 1 and 3 of the enabling switch are Off
functions. Only the middle position allows the enabling function. EN 60204-1:1997 is
identical to IEC 60204-1, whereby the 3-stage enabling switch is gaining international
importance.
The Stop category of the enabling equipment must be selected on the basis of a risk
assessment and correspond to a Category 0 or 1 Stop.
Warning
Enabling switches may only be used if the person activating them promptly recognizes a
danger to personnel and can immediately take steps to avoid the danger!
Commands for unsafe conditions are not permitted to be issued with one enabling switch
alone. For this purpose, a second deliberate start command via a button on the Mobile Panel
177 is required. The only person allowed to remain in the danger zone is the person who is
activating the enabling switch.
In special operating modes, safety is achieved through use of the enabling switch in
combination with reduction in the velocity of the drives that are posing the danger.
Safety instructions and general notes
2.8 STOP button
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
2-8 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Risk from improper use
To avoid risk from improper use of the enabling switches, the following actions must be
deliberately taken:
Scan the enabling switches.
The scan has to be carried out for the followed processes:
When the system being monitored is being switched on
When the operating mode changes from "Automatic" to "Manual mode"
In both cases, the enabling function may not be used.
The enabling switch must be released within a specified time frame and returned to the
"Enable" setting.
Select the time frame according to the activity on the system being monitored.
2.8 2.8 STOP button
Safety information
The STOP button on the HMI device brings about a safety-related stop of the system or
machine in accordance with EN 60204-1:1997, Section 9.2.5.3. You have the option of
implementing a Category 0, 1 or 2 Stop function in accordance with EN 60204-1: 1997,
Section 9.2.2. The Stop function category must be selected on the basis of a risk
assessment.
The Stop function of the HMI device can, therefore, be used as a reliable machine stop as
well as for looping in the Emergency Stop circuit of the system.
The signals of the STOP button are connected up differently in the Terminal Box Plus and in
the Terminal Box Basic.
Terminal Box Plus
In the terminal box, the signals control the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit of the system
or machine. If the HMI device is not connected, the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit is
closed.
Terminal Box Basic
With the Terminal Box Basic the signals of the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit are
controlled via the STOP button. If the Mobile Panel 177 is not connected, the Stop or
Emergency Stop circuit of the system or machine is open.
Stop loop through
The Stop or Emergency Off circuit of the system or machine is looped through the Terminal
Box Plus and not interrupted. The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit is interrupted if:
The STOP button is pressed on a connected Mobile Panel 177
A Mobile Panel 177 with pressed STOP button is connected
This functionality is only available in the Terminal Box Plus.
Safety instructions and general notes
2.9 Electromagnetic compatibility
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 2-9
Warning
HMI device with STOP button
If the HMI device is equipped with a STOP button and is not connected to the terminal box, a
Stop cannot be initiated using the HMI device. The STOP button of the HMI device is then
ineffective!
Install stationary Emergency Off buttons that are available at all times in the system.
Stop of Category 0 or 1:
If the circuit is implemented as a category 0 or 1 Stop, the Stop function must be effective
regardless of the operating mode. A Category 0 Stop must have priority. Releasing the
STOP button must not initiate a dangerous situation (see also EN 60204-1:1997, Section
9.2.5.3).
The Stop function is not to be used to replace safety equipment.
Notice
Terminal boxes in a system
Install only one type of terminal box (i.e., only Terminal Box Plus or only Terminal Box Basic)
in your system.
Mobile Panel 177 connected
If the Mobile Panel 177 is connected to the terminal box, the STOP button on the
Mobile Panel 177 can trip if it comes off, thus causing the system to come to a standstill.
2.9 2.9 Electromagnetic compatibility
Introduction
The HMI device fulfills requirements of the EMC Directive of the domestic European market
and other requirements.
EMC-compliant installation of HMI devices
An EMC-compliant installation of the HMI device and the use of interference-proof cables
form the basis of trouble-free operation. The "Directives for interference-free installation of
PLCs" and the "PROFIBUS Networks" manual also apply to the installation of the HMI
device.
Pulse-shaped interferences
The following table shows the EMC properties of the modules with respect to pulse-shaped
interference. A requirement for this is that the HMI device meets the specifications and
directives regarding electrical installation.
Safety instructions and general notes
2.9 Electromagnetic compatibility
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
2-10 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Pulse-shaped interferences
Pulse-Shaped
Interference
Tested with Corresponds to
test intensity
Electrostatic discharge
conforming to
IEC 61000-4-2
Air discharge: 8 kV
Contact discharge: 4 kV
3
Burst pulses
(high-speed transient
interference)
conforming to
IEC 61000-4-4
2 KV power supply cable
2 KV signal cable, > 30 m
1 KV signal cable, < 30 m
3
High-power surge pulses conforming to IEC 61000-4-5, external protective circuit required (see
S7 300 Automation System Manual, Installation, chapter on lightning and overvoltage protection).
Asymmetric coupling 2 kV power cable
DC voltage with protective elements
2 KV signal/data cable, > 30 m,
with protective elements as required
3
Asymmetric coupling 1 kV power cable
DC voltage with protective elements
1 KV signal cable, > 30 m,
with protective elements as required
3
Sinusoidal interferences
The table below shows the EMC properties of the modules with respect to sinusoidal
interference. A requirement for this is that the HMI device meets the specifications and
directives regarding electrical installation.
Sinusoidal interferences
Sinusoidal interference Test values Corresponds to
test intensity
RF interference
(electromagnetic fields)
conforming to
IEC 61000-4-3
conforming to
IEC 61000-4-3
10 V/m with 80 % amplitude modulation of 1 kHz in the
range from 80 MHz to 1 GHz and 1.4 GHz to 2 GHz
10 V/m with 50% pulse modulation at 900 MHz
10 V/m with 50% pulse modulation at 1.89 GHz
3
RF interference current
on cables and cable
shielding conforming to
IEC 61000-4-6
Test voltage 10 V with 80% amplitude modulation of
1 kHz in the range from 9 kHz to 80 MHz
3
Safety instructions and general notes
2.10 Transport and storage conditions
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 2-11
Emission of radio interference
Emission of electromagnetic interference conforming to 55011,
Limit value class A, Group 1, measured at a distance of 10 m:
From 30 MHz to 230 MHz < 40 dB (V/m) quasi-peak
From 230 MHz to 1000 MHz < 47 dB (V/m) quasi-peak
Additional measures
Before you connect an HMI device to the public network, ensure that it is compliant with Limit
Class B conforming to EN 55022.
2.10 2.10 Transport and storage conditions
Mechanical and climatic transport and storage conditions
The transport and storage conditions of this HMI device exceed requirements conforming to
IEC 61131-2. The following specifications apply to the transport and storage of an HMI
device in its original packaging.
The climatic conditions comply to the following standards:
IEC 60721-3-3, Class 3K7 for storage
IEC 60721-3-2, Class 2K4 for transport
The mechanical requirements are compliant with EC 60721-3-2, Class 2M2.
Transport and storage conditions for the HMI device
Type of Condition Permissible range
Drop test (in transport package) ≤ 1 m
Temperature From –20 to +60°C
Air pressure from 1080 hPa to 660 hPa,
corresponding to an elevation of - 1000 m to 3500 m
Relative humidity from 5% to 90%, without condensation
Sinusoidal vibration conforming to
IEC 60068-2-6
5 Hz to 9 Hz: 3.5 mm
9 Hz to 150 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
Shock conforming to IEC 60068-2-29 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks
Safety instructions and general notes
2.10 Transport and storage conditions
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
2-12 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Transport and storage conditions for the terminal box
Type of Condition Permissible range
Drop test (in transport package) ≤ 1 m
Temperature From –20 to +70 °C
Air pressure from 1080 hPa to 660 hPa,
corresponds to an elevation of - 1000 m to 3500 m
Relative humidity from 35% to 85%, without condensation
Sinusoidal vibration conforming to
IEC 60068-2-6
5 Hz to 9 Hz: 3.5 mm
9 Hz to 150 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
Shock conforming to IEC 60068-2-29 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks
Notice
Ensure that no condensation (dewing) develops on or inside the HMI device after
transporting it at low temperatures or after it has been exposed to extreme temperature
fluctuations.
The HMI device must have acquired room temperature before it is put into operation. Do not
expose the HMI device to direct radiation from a heater in order to warm it up. If dewing has
developed, wait approximately four hours after it is completely dry before you switch on the
HMI device.
Prerequisite for the trouble-free and safe operation of the HMI device is proper transport and
storage, installation and assembly and careful operation and maintenance.
Warranty for the HMI device is deemed void if these specifications are ignored.
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 3-1
Planning Use 3
3.1 3.1 Notes about Usage
Mechanical and Climatic Conditions of Use
The HMI device is designed for use in a sheltered location. The conditions of use are
compliant with requirements according to DIN IEC 60721-3-3:
Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements)
Class 3K3 (climatic requirements)
Use with additional measures
Examples of applications where the use of the HMI device requires additional measures:
In locations with a high degree of ionizing radiation
In locations with extreme operating conditions resulting from situations as follows:
Corrosive vapors, gases, oils or chemicals
Electrical or magnetic fields of high intensity
In plants requiring special monitoring, for example:
Elevator systems
Systems in especially hazardous rooms
Mechanical ambient conditions
The mechanical ambient conditions for the HMI device are specified in the following table in
terms of sinusoidal vibration.
Mechanical environmental conditions
Frequency range
in Hz
Constant Intermittent
10 ≤ f ≤ 58 Amplitude 0.0375 mm Amplitude 0.075 mm
58 ≤ f ≤ 150 Constant acceleration 0.5 g Constant acceleration 1 g
Planning Use
3.1 Notes about Usage
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
3-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Reduction of vibration
If the HMI device is subjected to greater shocks or vibrations, you must take appropriate
measures to reduce acceleration or amplitudes.
We recommend fitting the HMI device onto vibration-absorbent materials (on metal shock
absorbers, for example).
Testing for Mechanical Ambient Conditions
The following table provides information on the type and scope of tests for mechanical
environmental conditions.
Check of mechanical ambient conditions
The check
includes
Test standard Remarks
Vibrations Vibration test conforming to
IEC 60068, part 2–6 (sinusoidal)
Type of vibration:
Transitional rate of the frequency sweeps:
1 octave/minute.
10 ≤ f ≤ 58,
Constant amplitude 0.075 mm
58 ≤ f ≤ 150,
Constant acceleration 1 g
Vibration duration:
10 frequency cycles per axis in each of the three
axes vertical to each other
Shock Shock testing in accordance
with IEC 60068, Part 2 –29
Type of shock: Half sine
Shock intensity:
Peak value 5 g, duration 11 ms
Direction of impact:
3 shocks in ± direction of axis in each of the
three axes vertical to each other
Falling Drop test in accordance with
EN 60068-2-32EN 60068-2-32
Planning Use
3.1 Notes about Usage
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 3-3
Climatic ambient conditions for the Mobile Panel
The Mobile Panel may be used under the following climatic ambient conditions:
Climatic ambient conditions
Ambient conditions Permissible range Remarks
Temperature
Operation
Storage/Transport
From 0 to 40°C
From –20 to 60 °C
See the "Mounting positions and type of
fixation" section
Relative humidity
Operation
Storage/Transport
20 to 80%
5 to 90 %
Without condensation, corresponds to
relative humidity, stress class 2
conforming to IEC 61131, part 2
Air pressure 1080 to 795 hPa Corresponds to an altitude of -1000 m
to 2000 m
Pollutant concentration SO2: < 0,5 ppm;
relative humidity < 60 %, no
condensation
H2S: < 0.1 ppm;
relative humidity < 60%, no
condensation
Check: 10 ppm; 4 days
Check: 1 ppm; 4 days
Climatic ambient conditions for the terminal box
The terminal box may be used under the following climatic ambient conditions:
Climatic ambient conditions
Ambient conditions Permissible range Remarks
Temperature
Operation
Storage/Transport
From 0 to 50 °C
From –20 to 70 °C
See the "Mounting positions and type of
fixation" section
Relative humidity
Operation
Storage/Transport
35 to 85 %
35 to 85 %
Without condensation, corresponds to
relative humidity, stress class 2
conforming to IEC 61131, part 2
Air pressure 1080 to 795 hPa Corresponds to an altitude of -1000 m
to 2000 m
Pollutant concentration SO2: < 0.5 ppm;
relative humidity < 60%,
no condensation
H2S: < 0.1 ppm;
relative humidity < 60%,
no condensation
Check: 10 ppm; 4 days
Check: 1 ppm; 4 days
Planning Use
3.2 Mounting positions and type of fixation
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
3-4 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
3.2 3.2 Mounting positions and type of fixation
Mounting position
The wall holder is designed for vertical mounting.
The terminal box is designed for surface mounting independently of cabinets or control
panels.
The terminal box is self-ventilated and is approved for all mounting positions. Note that the
guaranteed protection rating is only ensured if the connecting cable or the dummy cap is
plugged into the terminal box.
3.3 3.3 Preparing mounting
Selecting the mounting location for the HMI device holder
Observe the following points when selecting the mounting location:
Position the wall holder so that the display of the hooked-in HMI device is not exposed to
direct sunlight.
Position the wall holder so that the HMI device can be hooked in ergonomically by the
user. Choose a suitable mounting height.
Maintaining clearances
The following clearances are required around the wall holder:



Planning Use
3.3 Preparing mounting
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 3-5
The following clearances are required around the Terminal Box DP:

The following clearances are required around the Terminal Box PN.

Planning Use
3.4 Specifications for Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of Protection
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
3-6 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
3.4 3.4 Specifications for Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of
Protection
Test voltages
Insulation resistance is demonstrated in the type test with the following test voltages
conforming to IEC 61131-2:
Circuits with a nominal voltage of Ue to other
circuits or ground
Test voltage
< 50 V 500 V DC
Protection class
Protection Class I conforming to IEC 60536, i.e. equipotential bonding conductor to profile
rail required!
Protection from foreign objects and water
Degree of protection conforming to
IEC 60529
Explanation
Front panel and rear panel In installed status:
IP65
Only for the terminal box:
NEMA 4X/NEMA 12 (indoor use only)
3.5 3.5 Nominal Voltages
The following table shows the permitted nominal voltage and the corresponding tolerance
range.
Permitted nominal voltages
Nominal voltage Tolerance range
+24 V DC 20.4 V to 28.8 V (–15%, +20%)
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 4-1
Mounting and Connection 4
4.1 4.1 Checking the package contents
Check the package contents for visible signs of transport damage and for completeness.
Notice
Do not install parts delivered damaged. In the case of damaged parts, contact your Siemens
representative.
Keep the accompanying documentation in a safe place. The documentation belongs to the
HMI device and is required for subsequent commissioning.
4.2 4.2 Mounting the terminal box and wall holder
Requirements
The following are required for mounting:
Three M5 cylinder head screws for the wall mounting of the HMI device
Four M4 cylinder head screws for the terminal box
If the HMI device is to be operated while hooked into the wall holder, ensure that the
connecting cable is sufficiently long.
Procedure – mounting the wall holder
Notice
In order to ensure that the HMI device can be hooked in securely, select a vertical surface or
one inclined slightly to the rear as the mounting surface.
For HMI device with STOP button:
The HMI device can fall down if it cannot be hooked in securely. In the process the STOP
button can be triggered unintentionally, thus causing the machine or system to stop.
Mounting and Connection
4.2 Mounting the terminal box and wall holder
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
4-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Note
Positioning
A position at eye level is recommended. This permits the Mobile Panel 177 to be operated
even if it is hooked into the wall holder.
Proceed as follows:
1. Select a position for the wall holder that can be reached easily and without danger.
2. Place the wall holder onto the mounting surface from the front.
3. Mark the mounting holes using a scriber.
4. Drill three through holes or three M5 threaded holes
5. Fasten the wall holder
Procedure – mounting the terminal box
Note
Length of the connecting cable
Take into account the maximum length of the connecting cable when selecting the position
for the terminal box.
Proceed as follows:
1. Select a position for the terminal box that can be reached easily and without danger.
2. Place the terminal box onto the mounting surface from the front.
3. Mark the mounting holes with a scriber.
4. Drill four through holes or four M4 threaded holes
Notice
Permissible torque
The terminal box housing is made of plastic. Do not exceed 0.4 to 0.5 Nm of torque when
tightening the screws.
5. Fastening the terminal box
See also
Mounting positions and type of fixation (Page 3-4)
Mounting and Connection
4.3 Electrical installation
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 4-3
4.3 4.3 Electrical installation
Electrical connections
The following section describes the electrical installation. It applies to the following
components:
Mobile Panel 177
Terminal box
The following devices and control elements can be connected to these components:
Device/Control element Mobile Panel 177 Terminal box
Configuration computer Yes Yes
Printer yes 1)
Controller Yes
Supply voltage Yes
Connection to Stop circuit Yes
Monitoring signal of the STOP
button
Yes
Connection to Enable circuit Yes
Cable for input bit for connection
detection
Yes
1) Applies to Mobile Panel 177 PN with network printer
4.4 4.4 Connecting the terminal box
Requirements
The terminal box is mounted in accordance with the specifications of these operating
instructions.
Always use shielded standard cables.
Note
The maximum length of the cable for connecting the Stop button and the Enable switch
may not exceed 30 m.
For further information, refer to the SIMATIC HMI Catalog ST 80.
Mounting and Connection
4.4 Connecting the terminal box
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
4-4 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Connection sequence
Connect the terminal box in the following sequence:
1. Equipotential bonding
2. Supply voltage
3. PLC/configuration computer as necessary
Notice
Connection sequence
Always follow the correct sequence for connecting the terminal box. Non-observance can
cause damage to the terminal box.
4.4.1 Opening and closing the terminal box
Introduction
Please note:
Caution
Short circuits in the terminal box can impair the function of the Mobile Panel 177.
When carrying out work in the opened terminal box ensure that conductive materials, such
as cable residues, do not come into contact with electrical circuits.
Caution
When working in the open housing, ensure that current-carrying conductors do not come into
contact with electrical circuits.
Note the ESD instructions.
Requirements
Torx screwdriver, Size 2
Mounting and Connection
4.4 Connecting the terminal box
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 4-5
Procedure
Figure 4-1 Opening the terminal box – example with Terminal Box DP
Screws
Cover
Screwed connections
Proceed as follows:
1. Loosen the four screws
2. Put down the screws and cover
3. Put the opened terminal box down securely
Protective cover of the Terminal Box PN
Protective cover
Note
Protective cover
Do not remove the protective cover, because otherwise the electronics of the terminal box
may be damaged or destroyed.
Mounting and Connection
4.4 Connecting the terminal box
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
4-6 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Notes on closing
Notice
Permissible torque
The terminal box housing is made of plastic. Therefore, the mounting hole threads cannot
handle the same amount of stress as a comparable metallic housing. Do not exceed 0.4 to
0.5 Nm of torque when tightening the screws.
If the screws are tightened more than 20 times, there is risk of damage to the threads.
Protection class IP65
Upon conclusion of your work on the connections, check to make sure that the unused
threaded cable entry holes are fitted with rubber seals. Otherwise, protection class IP65 is
not guaranteed.
4.4.2 Interfaces to the Terminal Box DP
The following interfaces are available on the terminal box:
Figure 4-2 Interfaces to the Terminal Box DP
Fast connector
Terminal strip 1 for RS 232, RS 422, RS 485 and power supply
Terminal strip 2 for safety function for STOP button and Enable switch and for additional
control system functions
Rotary encoder switch for entering the box ID
Socket for the connecting cable
Two PROFIBUS cables can be connected to the Fast Connector in order to loop the
PROFIBUS through.
Mounting and Connection
4.4 Connecting the terminal box
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 4-7
4.4.3 Interfaces to the Terminal Box PN
The following interfaces are available on the terminal box:
Figure 4-3 Interfaces to the Terminal Box PN
Fast connector
Terminal strip 1 for supply voltage
Terminal strip 2 for safety function for STOP button and Enable switch and for additional
control system functions
Rotary encoder switch for entering the box ID
Socket for the connecting cable
Two PROFINET cables can be connected to each Fast Connector in order to loop the
PROFINET through.
Mounting and Connection
4.4 Connecting the terminal box
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
4-8 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
4.4.4 Setting the box ID at the terminal box
Introduction
You can set a unique box ID for station identification in each terminal box. If configured
correspondingly, the box ID can be read out of the HMI device and transmitted to the
controller.
Rotary encoder switch
The following figures show the position of the two rotary encoder switches in the terminal
box:
Figure 4-4 Terminal Box DP
Figure 4-5 Terminal Box PN
Rotary encoder switch
Mounting and Connection
4.4 Connecting the terminal box
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 4-9
Example for setting the box ID
$
&
(
$
&
(
Figure 4-6 Example for the address "27H"
Rotary encoding switch for more significant bits
Rotary encoding switch for less significant bits
The figure shows the set address 27H, which is the same as address 39 in decimal format.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the terminal box.
2. Use a screwdriver to set the box ID
The input is in hexadecimal format Values between 0 and 255 can be set in decimal
format.
3. Closing the terminal box
Result
The box ID is set.
See also
Opening and closing the terminal box (Page 4-4)
Mounting and Connection
4.4 Connecting the terminal box
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
4-10 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
4.4.5 Stripping the insulation of cables
Stripping the insulation
Strip the insulation of the cables in accordance with the following figures
s
Figure 4-7 Stripping the insulation from the MPI/PROFIBUS-DP cable

Figure 4-8 Stripping the PROFINET cable
Note
Use the cable stripper listed in the Siemens IK 10 catalog in order to enable you to strip the
insulation from the cables faster and to the proper length.
Mounting and Connection
4.4 Connecting the terminal box
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 4-11
4.4.6 Connecting the Equipotential Bonding Circuit
Potential differences
Differences in potential between spatially separated system parts can lead to high equalizing
currents via the data cables and therefore to the destruction of their interfaces. This situation
may arise if the cable shields are fitted at both ends and grounded at different system parts.
Potential differences may develop when a system is connected to different network inputs.
General requirements of equipotential bonding
Potential differences must be reduced by means of equipotential bonding in order to ensure
trouble-free operation of the relevant components of the electronic system. The following
must therefore be observed when installing the equipotential bonding circuit:
The effectiveness of equipotential bonding increases as the impedance of the
equipotential bonding conductor decreases or as the size of its cross-section increases.
If two system parts are connected to each other via shielded data lines with shielding
connected to the grounding/protective conductor on both sides, the impedance of the
additionally installed equipotential bonding cables may not exceed 10% of the shielding
impedance.
The cross-section of a selected equipotential bonding conductor must be capable of
handling the maximum equalizing current. Experience shows that the best results for
equipotential bonding between cabinets are achieved with a minimum conductor cross-
section of 16 mm2.
Use equipotential bonding conductors made of copper or galvanized steel. Establish a
large-surface contact between the equipotential bonding conductors and the
grounding/protective conductor and protect these from corrosion.
Clamp the shielding of the data cable on the HMI device onto the equipotential bonding
strip so that it is flush and near using suitable cable clamps.
Route the equipotential bonding conductor and data cables in parallel with minimum
clearance between these.
Notice
Equipotential bonding conduction
Cable shielding is not suitable for equipotential bonding. Always use the prescribed
equipotential bonding conductors. The minimum cross-section of a conductor used for
equipotential bonding is 16 mm². When you install MPI and PROFIBUS DP networks,
always use cables with a sufficient crosssection since otherwise the interface modules
may be damaged or destroyed.
Mounting and Connection
4.4 Connecting the terminal box
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
4-12 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
4.4.7 Connecting the configuration computer
Introduction
Standard cables are available for the connections shown (refer to the Siemens ST80
catalog).
Connection configurator
The following figures show the connection between the terminal box and the configuration
computer via the network.
3&
5656
352),%86'3
Figure 4-9 Connect the configuration computer via MPI/PROFIBUS DP to a Terminal Box DP
1 When a serial interface is used during operation, IF1 (RS 232) and (RS 422/485) may only be
connected alternately. IF1 is positioned on Terminal strip 1 of the Terminal Box DP.
Mounting and Connection
4.4 Connecting the terminal box
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 4-13
352),1(7 352),1(7
3&
Figure 4-10 Connect the configuration computer via PROFINET to a Terminal Box PN
Mounting and Connection
4.4 Connecting the terminal box
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
4-14 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
4.4.8 Connecting the PLC
Connecting a PLC to a Terminal Box DP
The following figure shows the connection of the PLC to the Terminal Box DP.
77<
352),%86'3
6,0$7,&6
56
5656
6,0$7,&6
6,0$7,&6
56
6,0$7,&6
56
6,0$7,&6
352),%86'3
352),%86'3
56
77<
352),%86'3
3/&
IURPRWKHU
PDQXIDFWXUHUV
3/&
IURPRWKHU
PDQXIDFWXUHUV
1 When a serial interface is used during operation, IF1 (RS 232) and (RS 422/485) may only be
connected alternately at the terminal box
2 Use only the cables approved for that purpose to connect to a SIMATIC S7.
Notice
Protection rating
The adapter must be set up in such a way the an IP65 protection rating is ensured.
Always use the approved cables to connect a SIMATIC S7 PLC. Note also the maximum
permissible cable lengths for the process interface. Standard cables are available for the
connection. For further information, refer to the SIMATIC HMI Catalog ST 80.
Mounting and Connection
4.4 Connecting the terminal box
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 4-15
Configure the interfaces IF1 on the Terminal Box DP
The IF1 interface can be configured using the DIL switch.
The figure below shows the position of the DIL switch.
Figure 4-11 Position of the DIL switch
DIL switch
Note
Note the diagrams of the DIL switch settings on the inside of the cover.
Mounting and Connection
4.4 Connecting the terminal box
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
4-16 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
The following table shows the settings of the DIL switch. The transmitting and receiving
direction is switched internally with the RTS signal.
Communication Switch setting
56
03,352),%86'3
21
56
03,352),%86'3
/DVWQRGH
21
5656
21
%XWWRQ 21
21
Compressing the internal program memory with SIMATIC S5
Caution
Compressing the internal program memory
Compressing the internal program memory of the SIMATIC S5 PLC ("Compress" PU
function, integrated FB COMPR) is not permitted if an HMI device is connected! When
memory is compressed, the absolute addresses of the blocks in the program memory
change. Since the HMI device only reads the address list during startup, it does not
recognize the address change and accesses the wrong memory areas.
If you cannot avoid compressing memory during operation, turn off the HMI device before
running the compress function.
Mounting and Connection
4.4 Connecting the terminal box
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 4-17
Connecting a PLC to a Terminal Box PN
The following figure shows the connection of the PLC to the Terminal Box PN.
352),1(7
6WDQGDUG6YLD7&3,3 6WDQGDUG6YLD7&3,3
352),1(7
6,0$7,&6
4.4.9 Connect a printer.
Introduction
You can connect a printer to the Terminal Box PN via PROFINET:
The Mobile Panel 177 supports the following printer standards:
Compatible with ESC/P, 9-pin ESC/P or ESC/P2 (EPSON)
For example EPSON LQ 300+
Compatible with PCL3 (Hewlett Packard)
For example Brother HL 1450
The list of current printers and the required settings for operator control devices can be found
on the Internet at: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/en/11376409.
Requirements
The terminal box is connected.
Mounting and Connection
4.4 Connecting the terminal box
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
4-18 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Connection configurator
The following figure shows the connection between the Terminal Box PN and a printer.
352),1(7
Figure 4-12 Connect the printer via PROFINET to the Terminal Box PN
Note
ASCII character set
On some printers you may also have to set the ASCII character set used in the project.
Note
Printer documentation
Observe the printer documentation when you connect the printer.
4.4.10 Connecting the Power Supply
Introduction
The supply voltage for the HMI device is connected to a terminal strip in the terminal box.
The terminal block is designed for cables with a maximum cross-section of 1,5 mm2.
Connect the ground terminal of the terminal box to the cabinet ground.
Note
Polarity reversal protection
The terminal box has polarity reversal protection.
Mounting and Connection
4.4 Connecting the terminal box
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 4-19
Wiring diagram
The following figures show the connection of the power supply to the terminal box.
3(
0
3
Figure 4-13 Connecting the power supply to the Terminal Box DP
3(
0
3
Figure 4-14 Connecting the power supply to the Terminal Box PN
The abbreviations in the figure are defined as follows:
PE stands for equipment grounding conductor
M stands for ground
P24 stands for +24 VDC
Please refer to Technical Data for information on the voltage supply requirements.
Warning
24 V DC -supply
Personal injury and equipment damage can occur. Rate the 24 V DC power supply of the
Mobile Panel 177 correctly. Otherwise components of your automation system can be
damaged and persons can be injured.
Use only voltage generated as safety extra-low voltage (SELV) for the 24 VDC supply of the
Mobile Panel 177.
Mounting and Connection
4.4 Connecting the terminal box
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
4-20 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Caution
Safe electrical isolation
When using a 24 VDC supply, make sure that the extra-low voltage is isolated safely.
Always use power supply modules that conform to IEC 364-4-41 or HD 384.04.41
(VDE 0100, Part 410).
The supply voltage must be within the specified range. Otherwise malfunctions in the HMI
device may result.
The 24 V output of the power supply must be connected to the equipotential bonding;
because the potential difference between the PLC and the HMI device can destroy the
communication interface.
4.4.11 Connecting the connecting cable
Introduction
The connecting cable can be connected to the terminal box using the plug connector
(metallic push-pull circular connector). The plug connector is coded anti-rotationally using a
slot and key system.
Interlocking mechanism
Figure 4-15 Interlocking mechanism
Interlocking claws
Outer sleeve
Clamping nut
Cable
Strain direction
If you pull on the cable or the clamping nut, the taper sleeve moves under the interlocking
claws and presses them into the interlocking slot. The plug connection cannot be separated.
Mounting and Connection
4.4 Connecting the terminal box
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 4-21
Figure 4-16 Detaching the plug connector
Interlocking claws
Outer sleeve
Strain direction
If you pull on the outer sleeve, the interlocking claws slide out of the interlocking slot. The
plug connection can be separated.
Procedure – plugging the connector
Proceed as follows:
1. Pull back the outer sleeve on the plug connector
2. With the outer sleeve retracted, insert the plug connector into the socket of the terminal
box.
3. Release the outer sleeve
This automatically slides in the direction of the terminal box, thereby interlocking the plug
connector.
Procedure – removing the connector
Proceed as follows:
1. Pull back the outer sleeve on the plug connector
2. With the outer sleeve retracted, pull the plug connector out of the socket of the terminal
box.
If you do not intend to use the Mobile Panel 177 on another terminal box, place the Mobile
Panel 177 securely in the wall holder.
Mounting and Connection
4.5 Connecting Mobile Panel 177
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
4-22 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
4.5 4.5 Connecting Mobile Panel 177
Connecting the Cables
When connecting the cables, ensure that you do not bend any of the contact pins. Secure
the connectors with screws.
The pin assignment of the interfaces is described in the specifications.
4.5.1 Opening and closing the terminal compartment
Introduction
Before you begin:
Caution
Malfunctions
If the HMI device lies on its front, the STOP button can trigger. Other operating elements
(key-operated switches, illuminated pushbuttons) can be triggered unintentionally, thus
causing malfunctions.
If you open the terminal compartment, you must therefore remove the connecting cable
belonging to the Mobile Panel 177 from the terminal box.
ESD guidelines
Note the ESD instructions.
Note
Pay attention to cleanliness. Foreign bodies or liquids must not come into contact with the
printed circuit board or penetrate the inside of the HMI device.
Place the HMI device with the front side on a flat, clean surface to protect against damage.
Requirements
Crosstip screwdriver, Size 2
Mounting and Connection
4.5 Connecting Mobile Panel 177
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 4-23
Procedure
Figure 4-17 Opening the terminal compartment
Cover
Screws on the cover
Plugs
Outlet
Proceed as follows:
1. Screw out the six screws of the cover about 1 cm
The cover is designed in such a way that the screws cannot be lost. Therefore, do not
screw the screws out further than 1 cm. They can then be removed together with the
cover where they will remain intact.
2. Lay down the cover with the screws
3. Plug the plug into the outlet that is not used
Notes for closing
Notice
Permissible torque
The housing of the Mobile Panel 177 is made of plastic. Therefore, the mounting hole
threads cannot handle the same amount of stress as a comparable metallic housing. Do not
exceed 0.4 to 0.5 Nm of torque when tightening the screws.
If the screws are tightened more than 20 times, there is risk of damage to the threads.
Protection class IP65
Ensure that the seal belonging to the cover is present during mounting. Upon conclusion of
your work on the connections, check to make sure that the unused outlet is fitted with the
plug. Otherwise, protection class IP65 is not guaranteed.
Mounting and Connection
4.5 Connecting Mobile Panel 177
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
4-24 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
4.5.2 Interfaces on the Mobile Panel 177 DP
The following interfaces are available on the Mobile Panel 177 DP:
Figure 4-18 Interfaces on the Mobile Panel 177 DP
Slot with a MultiMediaCard
RJ45 connector for the connecting cable
RS 485 interface (IF 2)
Connection for optional accumulator
Female header, 10-pin for the connecting cable
Note
RJ45 connector
Use the RJ45 connector only for the connecting cable to the terminal box.
4.5.3 Interfaces on Mobile Panel 177 PN
The following interfaces are available on the Mobile Panel 177 PN:
Figure 4-19 Interfaces on Mobile Panel 177 PN
Slot with MultiMediaCard
RS 485 interface (IF 2)
RJ45 connector for the connecting cable
Connection for optional accumulator
Female header, 12-pin for the connecting cable
Mounting and Connection
4.5 Connecting Mobile Panel 177
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 4-25
Note
RJ45 connector
Use the RJ45 connector only for the connecting cable to the terminal box.
4.5.4 Connecting the configuration computer
Requirements
The cover of the terminal compartment at the Mobile Panel 177 is removed.
The Mobile Panel 177 is connected to the terminal box.
Wiring diagram
The following figure shows the serial connection via RS 485 between the HMI device and the
configuration computer for transferring the image, project and other project data.
3&
56
56
Figure 4-20 Connecting the configuration computer to the Mobile Panel 177, example
Mobile Panel 177 PN
For the conversion from RS 232 to RS 485, order the PC-PPI adapter,
Order No. 6ES7 901- 3CB30-0XA0, from Siemens AG.
The interfaces are described in the Technical Data.
Notice
You cannot fasten the cover of the terminal compartment while a configuration computer is
connected directly to the Mobile Panel 177.
Therefore only connect a configuration computer briefly directly to the Mobile Panel 177, for
example during commissioning.
Mounting and Connection
4.6 Switching on and testing the HMI device
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
4-26 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
4.6 4.6 Switching on and testing the HMI device
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Switching on the power supply
The display lights up after power is switched on. A progress bar is displayed during
startup.
If the HMI device does not start, it is possible the wires on the terminal block have been
crossed. Check the connected wires and change the connections if necessary. The
Loader is displayed once the operating system has started.
Figure 4-21 Display of the loader on the Mobile Panel 177
The HMI device automatically switches to "Transfer" mode during initial startup if no
project is already loaded on the device and at least one data channel is configured.
During this process the following dialog appears:
Figure 4-22 "Transfer" dialog
2. Touch "Cancel" to stop the transfer.
Result
The Loader appears again.
Note
When restarting the system, a project may already be loaded on the HMI device. The system
then skips "Transfer" mode and starts the project.
Use the relevant operator control object to close the project.
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.
Mounting and Connection
4.6 Switching on and testing the HMI device
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 4-27
Function test
Perform a function test following commissioning. The HMI device is fully functional when one
of the following states is indicated:
The "Transfer" dialog is displayed.
The Loader is displayed.
A project is started.
Switching off the HMI device
Options for switching off the HMI device:
Switch off the power supply.
Pull the connecting cable on the terminal box
Note
Recovery time
Wait for approx. one second after you have removed the connecting cable from the
terminal box before you plug the connecting cable back into the terminal box.
Wait approx. one second after switching off the power supply before you switch it back on
again.
After power failures lasting less than one second the connecting cable has to be
disconnected.
See also
Configuring the data channel (Page 6-31)
Mounting and Connection
4.6 Switching on and testing the HMI device
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
4-28 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 5-1
Operator elements and displays 5
5.1 5.1 Mobile Panel
5.1.1 Operator control elements
The Mobile Panel 177 has the following operator control elements:
Color STN-LC display, Q-VGA, with touch screen, analog, resistive
Membrane keyboard
Enable switch
The Mobile Panel 177 offers the following optional elements:
Handwheel
STOP button
Illuminated pushbutton
Key-operated switch
Operator elements and displays
5.1 Mobile Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
5-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
5.1.2 Front-side operator control elements
Figure 5-1 Operator control elements of the Mobile Panel 177
STOP button
Display with touch screen
Function keys without LED
Key-operated switch
Handwheel
Function keys with LED
Illuminated pushbutton
The standard input unit on the HMI device is the touch screen. All operator control objects
required for touch operation are displayed on the touch screen once the HMI device has
started.
The function assigned to a specific softkey is defined during configuration. The softkeys do
not have any function outside projects.
The state of the softkeys is evaluated in the project or as a direct button. The state of the
LEDs of the softkeys can be set by the controller.
Notice
Damaging the touch screen
Touching the touch screen with hard, sharp or pointed iobjects or applying excessive
pressure when operating the touch screen will substantially reduce its useful life and can
even lead to total failure.
Always operate the HMI touch screen with your fingers or with a touch pen.
Keyboard damage
Only use your fingers to operate the HMI device keys.
Pressing the keys with hard instruments considerably reduces the service life of the key
mechanism.
Operator elements and displays
5.1 Mobile Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 5-3
5.1.3 Enable switch
Introduction
Enabling equipment consists of two enabling switches arranged on both sides of the Mobile
Panel 177. The switch setting of the two enabling switches is determined by electrical
momentary contact switches. The associated evaluating logic involves two channels for each
enabling switch. Each channel converts the information of the enabling switch into digital and
analog information (diversity).
Figure 5-2 Enable switch
Enable switch
Operation
You only have to activate one enabling switch. No feedback is provided to the PLC on
whether the Mobile Panel 177 is operated with one hand or two hands.
Note
Because there is no electrical connection between the enabling switch and the membrane
keyboard, the enabling switches and the membrane keyboard can be operated
simultaneously.
When an external monitoring device is used, the enabling switches satisfy Category 3 safety
requirements as defined in EN 954.
Operator elements and displays
5.1 Mobile Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
5-4 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Switch settings
The primary function of the evaluating logic is to recognize the three switch settings:
Switch setting Function Enable switch Switch state
1 Neutral position Not activated OFF (open)
2 Enable Activated ON (closed)
3 Panic Pressed OFF (open)
(6 (6 (6(QDEOHVZLWFK
 
Figure 5-3 Switch settings of enabling switch
When the enabling switch is activated, the following switch sequences are possible:
Normal activation
(6(QDEOHVZLWFK
1HXWUDOSRVLWLRQ
(6(6
6ZLWFKVHWWLQJ
(6(6
(QDEOH
1HXWUDOSRVLWLRQ
[\
[
\

Figure 5-4 Interlinking of switch settings for normal operation
Panic activation
If the operator has pressed the enabling switch through to the "Panic" setting, the "Enable"
setting will be skipped when the switch is released.
(6(QDEOHVZLWFK
1HXWUDOSRVLWLRQ
(6(6
6ZLWFKVHWWLQJ
(6(6
(QDEOH
3DQLF 1HXWUDOSRVLWLRQ
[X\
[X
\

Figure 5-5 Interlinking of switch settings for panic activation
The signals of the enabling switch are fed to the terminal box via the connecting cable. For
manual special operating modes, these signals must be interconnected from the terminal
box to the safety circuit using two channels for power interruption.
The position of the enabling switch can be scanned in the Mobile Panel 177 via the CPU and
evaluated for non-safety relevant functions by the software.
The safety shutdown does not require an acknowledgement when an enabling switch is
released or pressed through to the panic setting!
Operator elements and displays
5.1 Mobile Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 5-5
5.1.4 STOP button
5.1.4.1 Overview
Introduction
The STOP button is an optional control element on Mobile Panel 177. The STOP button is
designed with 2 circuits and allows a safety-related stop of the system being monitored.
When an external monitoring device is used, the STOP button fulfils Category 3 safety
requirements as defined in EN 954. For further safety instructions please refer to the safety
instructions and general notes chapter.
Depending on the terminal box utilized, the stop circuit will be opened when the Mobile Panel
177 is unplugged or the circuit will be automatically short-circuited by the terminal box.
Possible application areas for the STOP button:
The STOP button can be used to quickly stop the system being monitored (system,
machine, or machine zone) according to the process cycle. The Stop operation can occur
with or without a power shutdown.
Advantages:
Containing the sphere of action
Faster restart
No loss of machine coordinates and, thus, no recalibration upon restart
Preservation of tool and workpiece
Triggering the Emergency Stop function of a system being monitored by looping it in in
the Emergence Stop circuit.
Advantage:
Simple integration in an existing Emergency Stop circuit when the system to be
monitored has no option for a fast process stop.
Operator elements and displays
5.1 Mobile Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
5-6 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Figure 5-6 STOP button
Fall protection
STOP button
Due to its placement, the STOP button is equally accessible to both left-handed and right-
handed individuals.
Due to its profiled design, the STOP button is easily accessible. The STOP button is fall
protected by a special collar. As a result, while the STOP button can still be triggered if the
Mobile Panel 177 is dropped, it is nonetheless largely protected from damage.
Operation
The STOP button is operated by pressing the button. Once the stop operation has been
initiated, the STOP button remains engaged in the stop position.
Note
The STOP button engages compulsorily when activated.
Releasing the STOP button
Warning
If you activate the STOP button, thus bringing the system being monitored to a standstill, you
may only release the STOP button if the reason for stopping the system has been eliminated
and a safe restart is provided for.
To release the STOP button, it must be turned in a clockwise direction. The STOP button
then returns on its own to the starting position.
Operator elements and displays
5.1 Mobile Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 5-7
5.1.4.2 Safety functions of the STOP button
A STOP button is available as an optional operator control element on the Mobile Panel 177.
The STOP button on the Mobile Panel 177 brings about a safety-related Stop of the system
being monitored in accordance with EN 60204-1:1997, Section 9.2.5.3. You have the option
of implementing a Category 0, 1, or 2 Stop function in accordance with EN 60204-1: 1997,
Section 9.2.2. The stop function category must be selected on the basis of a risk
assessment.
The Mobile Panel 177's stop function can, therefore, be used as a reliable machine stop as
well as for looping in the Emergency Stop circuit of the system to be monitored.
The signals of the STOP button are wired differently in the two versions of the terminal box.
In the Terminal Box Plus, the signals control the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit of the
system being monitored. If the Mobile Panel 177 is not connected, the Stop or Emergency
Stop circuit is closed. In the Terminal Box Basic, on the other hand, the signals of the Stop or
Emergency Stop circuit are fed via the STOP button. If the Mobile Panel 177 is not
connected, the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit of the system being monitored is open.
The term "Stop loop through" has the following meaning:
The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit of the system being monitored is looped through the
terminal box and not interrupted, irrespective of whether the Mobile Panel 177 is connected
to the terminal box (and STOP button not activated).
This functionality is only available in the Terminal Box Plus.
Warning
Mobile Panel 177 with STOP button
If the Mobile Panel 177 is equipped with a STOP button and is not connected to the terminal
box, a Stop cannot be initiated using the Mobile Panel 177. The STOP button of the Mobile
Panel 177 is then ineffective.
Install stationary Emergency Off buttons that are available at all times on the system being
monitored.
Category 0 or 1 stop
If a Category 0 or 1 stop circuit is implemented, the stop function must be in effect
regardless of the operating mode. A Category 0 Stop must have precedence. Releasing the
STOP button must not initiate a dangerous situation (see also EN 60204-1:1997,
Section 9.2.5.3).
The stop function is not to be used as a replacement for safety equipment.
Notice
Several terminal boxes
Install only one type of terminal box (i.e., Terminal Box Plus or Terminal Box Basic) for
monitoring your system.
STOP button can trigger when falling down
If the Mobile Panel 177 is connected to the terminal box, the STOP button on the Mobile
Panel 177 can trip if it comes off, thus causing the system to come to a standstill.
Operator elements and displays
5.1 Mobile Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
5-8 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
5.1.4.3 STOP button on Terminal Box Plus
Introduction
A Terminal Box Plus differs from a Terminal Box Basic due to four relays that are mounted
on the board.
'3 31
Figure 5-7 Terminal Box Plus
Relay
Board
Switching states of the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit with Terminal Box Plus
The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit switching statuses for a connected Mobile Panel 177
with a STOP button and Terminal Box Plus are:
Mobile Panel 177 STOP button Status of the Stop or
Emergency Stop circuit
Connected Not pressed The Stop or Emergency Stop
circuit remains closed.
Connected Pressed The Stop or Emergency Stop
circuit is open.
The system being monitored is
shut down.
Not connected - The Stop or Emergency Stop
circuit remains closed.
Operator elements and displays
5.1 Mobile Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 5-9
The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit switching statuses for a connected Mobile Panel 177
without a STOP button and Terminal Box Plus are:
Mobile Panel 177 STOP button Status of the Stop or
Emergency Stop circuit
Connected Not present The Stop or Emergency Stop
circuit remains closed.
Not connected Not present The Stop or Emergency Stop
circuit remains closed.
Warning
Disconnecting the Mobile Panel 177
If you disconnect the Mobile Panel 177 from the Terminal Box Plus, the Stop or Emergency
Stop circuit is closed and the Stop status of the system being monitored will be nullified. This
occurs irrespective of whether the STOP button has been pressed on the Mobile Panel 177.
Notice
Approximately 100 ms elapse between the time the STOP button is pressed and the Stop
contacts respond at the Terminal Box Plus.
5.1.4.4 STOP button on Terminal Box Basic
Introduction
In contrast to the Terminal Box Plus, the "Stop loop through" function is not implemented on
the Terminal Box Basic. Relays, such as those contained on the Terminal Box Plus are thus
not required.
Figure 5-8 Terminal Box Basic
Operator elements and displays
5.1 Mobile Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
5-10 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Caution
If the Mobile Panel 177 is connected, the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit is controlled via the
STOP button. If the connecting cable of the Mobile Panel 177 is disconnected from the
Terminal Box Basic, the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit is interrupted and a safe shutdown
of the system being monitored or Emergency Stop is executed.
Switching states of the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit with Terminal Box Basic
The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit switching statuses for a connected Mobile Panel 177
with a STOP button and Terminal Box Basic are:
Mobile Panel 177 STOP button Status of the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit
Connected Not pressed The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit remains
closed.
Connected Pressed The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit is open.
The system being monitored is shut down.
Not connected - The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit is open.
The system being monitored is shut down.
The stop circuit switch states for a connected Mobile Panel 177 without a STOP button and
Terminal Box Basic are:
Mobile Panel 177 STOP button Status of the Stop or Emergency Stop circuit
Connected Not present The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit remains
closed.
Not connected Not present The Stop or Emergency Stop circuit is open.
The system being monitored is shut down.
Warning
If you have shut down the system, you can only release the STOP button or place the
system being monitored back into operation if the condition triggering the Stop function has
been corrected and a safe restart is provided for.
Operator elements and displays
5.1 Mobile Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 5-11
5.1.5 Hand wheel
Introduction
The hand wheel is an optional control element at the Mobile Panel 177. The hand wheel can
be turned without a stop and does not have a zero position.
You can use the hand wheel to input incremental values.
The status of the hand wheel is evaluated as a direct button or via WinCC flexible system
functions.
Figure 5-9 Hand wheel
Hand wheel with recess
Operation
To facilitate operation, the hand wheel has a small recess.
Operator elements and displays
5.1 Mobile Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
5-12 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
5.1.6 Key-operated switch
Introduction
The key switch is an optional control element of the Mobile Panel 177. The key switch is
used to lock functions that are triggered by the Mobile Panel 177.
The status of the key switch is evaluated as a direct button or via WinCC flexible system
functions.
Figure 5-10 Key-operated switch
Key-operated switch
Operation
The key-operated switch has three positions: I-0-II.
,,,
Figure 5-11 Key-operated switch settings
The key can be removed in the Switch Setting 0.
Remove the key after use. This avoids possible damage to the key if the HMI device falls.
Note
The key for the key-operated switch is enclosed with the HMI device. Its coding is not
specific to the device. Therefore, the key can be used for any Mobile Panel 177.
Operator elements and displays
5.1 Mobile Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 5-13
5.1.7 Illuminated pushbutton
Introduction
The illuminated pushbutton is an optional control element on the Mobile Panel 177. The
illuminated pushbutton is available for rapid digital inputs.
The status of the illuminated pushbutton is evaluated as a direct button or via WinCC flexible
system functions. The state of the LEDs of the illuminated pushbuttons can be set by the
controller.
Figure 5-12 Illuminated pushbutton
Illuminated pushbutton
Operation
The illuminated pushbutton acts by touch-control.
Operator elements and displays
5.2 Holding and placing the Mobile Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
5-14 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
5.2 5.2 Holding and placing the Mobile Panel
Mobile Panel 177 position for manual operation
Figure 5-13 Underarm position for right or left handed individuals
The positions shown above enable actions to be performed on the system being monitored,
e.g., during maintenance.
In the underarm position shown, both right and left handed individuals can operate the HMI
device equally well. All operator control elements on the front can be reached with your free
hand. The hand holding the HMI device can also be used to activate the enabling switch.
Control inputs are enabled when just one of the enabling switches is activated.
The enabling switch is required to confirm the action. The enabling switch is optimally placed
for reachability. It triggers a safety shutdown in the event of panic situations involving
potential danger (release or clench).
The STOP button can also be quickly reached with your free hand.
Handling the HMI device when manipullating data
This position is only permitted when you are manipulating data on the system being
monitored.
Notice
If you are manually controlling unsafe actions in special operating modes, you must use one
of the underarm positions shown above, so that you can quickly reach the STOP button or
enabling switch, for example, should a dangerous situation arise.
Figure 5-14 Two hand position
Operator elements and displays
5.2 Holding and placing the Mobile Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 5-15
Placing the Mobile Panel 177
A wall holder is available for secure and location-specific placement of the HMI device The
wall holder enables you to use the Mobile Panel 177 as a stationary HMI device.
Figure 5-15 Mobile Panel 177 in the wall holder
Notice
If the Mobile Panel 177 is hung on an unsuitable holder, the ability to operate the STOP
button may be compromised.
Operator elements and displays
5.3 Terminal Box PN
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
5-16 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
5.3 5.3 Terminal Box PN
Introduction
Six LEDs that display the communication status are positioned on the front of the Terminal
Box PN
LED displays (green LED "LNK", yellow LED "ACT")
Two LED displays "LNK" and "ACT" each exist for the following connections:
PROFINET connection Port1
PROFINET connection Port2
Mobile Panel 177
Meaning of the LED displays
The LED "LNK" lights up if a cable is connected and the connection is error-free at the
corresponding interface of the Terminal Box PN.
The LED "ACT" flashes when data are being transferred via the corresponding interface.
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 6-1
Configuring the operating system 6
6.1 6.1 Overview
Loader
The figure below shows the Loader.
Figure 6-1 HMI device Loader
The Loader buttons have the following functions:
Use the "Transfer" button to set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
The transfer mode can only be activated when at least one data channel has been
enabled for the transfer.
Press the "Start" button to open the project stored on the HMI device.
Press "Control Panel" to open the HMI device Control Panel
The Control Panel is used to configure various settings such as the transfer settings.
Configuring the operating system
6.1 Overview
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
6-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Press the "Taskbar" button to activate the taskbar containing the open Windows CE Start
menu.
Figure 6-2 Windows CE Start menu
Password Protection
You can protect the Control Panel and taskbar from unauthorized access. When password
protections is enabled, the message "[password protect ]DNT" is displayed in the Loader.
If the password is not entered, only the "Transfer" and "Start" buttons are operable.
This prevents inadvertent operations and increases security for the plant or machine
because the settings cannot be changed when a project is not open.
Notice
If the password is no longer available, you cannot change settings in the Control Panel and
taskbar unless you update the operating system.
All data on the HMI device will be overwritten when you update the operating system.
See also
Switching on and testing the HMI device (Page 4-26)
Configuring the data channel (Page 6-31)
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 6-3
6.2 6.2 Control Panel
6.2.1 Overview
Control Panel of the HMI Device
The settings you can make in the Control Panel of the HMI device include:
Communication
Date/time
Screen saver
Backup and restore
Regional settings
Transfer settings
Delay time
Password
Opening the Control Panel
Touch the "Control Panel" button in the Loader to open the HMI device Control Panel.
The following options are available to open the Loader:
The Loader appears briefly after starting the HMI device.
Closing a Project
If configured, touch the relevant operator control object to stop the project. The Loader
opens. Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.
Figure 6-3 Control Panel of the HMI device
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
6-4 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
"Backup/Restore" Backing and restoring the HMI device image and the project on
memory cards
"Communication Properties" Setting device names for network operation
"Date/Time" Setting the data and time of day on the HMI device
"InputPanel" Configuring the screen keyboard
"Keyboard" Setting the character repeat for the screen keyboard
"Mouse" Setting the double-click on the touch screen
"Network" Setting network parameters
"OP" Changing screen settings, displaying information about HMI device,
calibrating the touch screen
"Password" Setting password protection for the Control Panel
"Printer" Configuring printers
"Regional Settings" Making local region settings
"S7 Transfer Settings" Setting the transfer parameters for MPI/DP
"Screen Saver" Configuring the screen saver
"System" Displaying information about the operating system, processor and
memory
"Transfer" Configuring a data channel for the transfer
"WinCC Internet Settings" Parameters for using the Internet - for PN HMI devices only
Procedure
Proceed as follows to change settings in the Control Panel:
1. You must exit the project before changing settings in the Control Panel.
Use the provided operating control component..
2. Open the Control Panel as described above.
3. Open the desired dialog by double-clicking on the corresponding icon in the Control
Panel.
Enter the required password if the Control Panel is protected against unauthorized
access.
4. Change settings for your HMI device in the Control Panel.
To change settings, touch the respective input field or check box and use the displayed
screen keyboard if necessary.
5. Press to close the dialog.
6. Press the button or to close the Control Panel.
7. Open the project in the Loader.
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 6-5
6.2.2 Entry using the screen keyboard
Introduction
A variety of screen keyboards are available to input information outside an open project, for
example in the Control Panel. A screen keyboard appears as soon as you touch an input
field. You can switch the screen keyboard and change its position on screen. Confirm your
entries with or discard your entries with . Either action closes the screen keyboard.
Screen Keyboard Outside an Open Project
Numerical screen keyboard
Alphanumerical screen keyboard
Figure 6-4 Alphanumerical screen keyboard, normal level
The alphanumerical keyboard has multiple levels.
1. Normal level
2. Shift level
3. Level on which the control keys are activated
You can also reduce both screen keyboards:
Switching between Screen Keyboards
switches between the alphanumerical and numerical screen keyboards
switches between the normal level and Shift level of the alphanumerical screen
keyboard
activates and deactivates the numerical and alphanumerical keys of the
alphanumerical screen keyboard
switches from full display to reduced display
switches from reduced display to full display
closes the reduced display of the screen keyboard
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
6-6 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Moving the Screen Keyboard on the Touch Screen
You can move the screen keyboard if it blocks you from operating a dialog in any way.
1. Touch .
Keep touch contact to move the screen keyboard on the touch screen. Release touch
contact on the icon when the required position is reached.
6.2.3 Configuring the screen keyboard
Introduction
In the Control Panel you can configure the screen keyboard that is used to make entries
outside an open project.
Requirements
The "Siemens HMI Input Panel - Options" dialog has been opened with the "Input Panel"
icon.
Figure 6-5 "Siemens HMI Input Panel – Options" dialog
Button for displaying the screen keyboard
Button for saving the screen keyboard
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 6-7
Procedure
1. Touch the "Open Input Panel" button.
The screen keyboard is displayed.
The "Siemens HMI Input Panel – Options" dialog changes its appearance.
Button for closing the screen keyboard
Button for saving the screen keyboard
2. Touch the <Num> button of the screen keyboard two toggle between the numerical and
alphanumerical screen keyboard.
Set the position of the screen keyboard.
3. Touch the "Save" button to save the settings.
4. Touch the "Close Input Panel" button to close the screen keyboard.
5. Close the dialog with or .
Result
The screen keyboard settings have been modified.
See also
Entry using the screen keyboard (Page 6-5)
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
6-8 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
6.2.4 Setting the character repetition of the screen keyboard
Introduction
In the Control Panel you can set the character repeat for the screen keyboard that is used to
make entries outside an open project.
Requirements
The "Keyboard Properties" dialog has been opened with the "Keyboard" icon.
Figure 6-6 "Keyboard Properties" dialog
Check box for activating the character repeat
Slide bar and buttons for the delay time before character repeat
Slide bar and buttons for the rate of the character repeat
Test field
You can change the settings in the "Keyboard Properties" dialog with the buttons and slide
bar.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Specify whether or not the character repeat of the keyboard should be activated.
Activate the "Enable character repeat" check box to enable the character repeat.
Deactivate the "Enable character repeat" check box to disable the character repeat.
2. Use the buttons or slide bar to set use and rate of the character repeat.
3. Verify your settings.
Touch the test field. The screen keyboard opens.
Move the screen keyboard as needed.
Touch any character and keep it pressed.
Check the activation of the character repeat and its rate in the test field.
Correct your setting if necessary.
4. Close the dialog and save your entries with . Touch to discard the entries.
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 6-9
Result
The character repeat for the keyboard is now set.
6.2.5 Setting the double-click on the touch screen
Introduction
You can start application in the Control Panel and in Windows CE with a double-click, two
brief touches is sequence.
Set the time between two touches in the Control Panel.
Requirements
The "Mouse Properties" dialog has been opened with the "Mouse" icon.
Figure 6-7 "Mouse Properties" dialog
Touch the pattern ② twice in sequence to set the time and spatial distance between the
touches on the screen.
Pattern
Symbol
Touch the ③ icon twice in sequence to check the setting of your double-click. If the icon does
not change, adjust your settings using the ② pattern again.
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
6-10 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the pattern twice.
The pattern is displayed in inverse colors at the second touch.
2. Touch the icon twice.
If the double-click is detected, the icon is displayed as follows at the second touch.
3. If the icon remains unchanged, double-click on the pattern again.
4. Close the dialog and save your entries with . Touch to discard the entries.
Result
The double-click on the touch screen is now set.
6.2.6 Backup and restore using a memory card
Introduction
A backup involves copying the operating system, applications and data in flash memory of
the HMI device to a memory card.
A restore operation deletes all old data from flash memory of the HMI device on
confirmation. The data stored on the memory card is then copied to the internal flash
memory.
Requirements
A memory card with ≥16 MB capacity is inserted in the HMI device.
The "Backup/Restore" dialog has been opened with the "Backup/Restore" icon.
Figure 6-8 "Backup/Restore" dialog
Button for data backup
Button for data restore
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 6-11
Procedure - Backup
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the "BACKUP" button.
The message "Starting backup" is displayed.
The following message appears if no memory card is inserted in the card slot or if the
memory card is damaged:
Then perform steps 2 and 3.
2. Touch .
This message is displayed: "Backup aborted".
3. Confirm with "OK".
The Control Panel is displayed again.
Repeat the procedure with a suitable memory card.
1. Using the memory card
2. Touch the "BACKUP" button.
The message "Storage card detected" is displayed.
A warning is displayed if the available space is insufficient. The backup is aborted.
Delete any unneeded data on the memory card using the Windows CE Explorer.
If the memory card contains data, the following message is displayed: "You have an
old backup on the storage card. Do you want to delete it?".
3. Press "Yes" if you want to delete the data.
Press "No" if you want to retain the data.
The messages "Checking the registry settings" and "Saving CE image" are displayed in
sequence when the backup begins. A progress bar shows the status of the process.
The backup ends with the following message: "Backup successfully completed.Touch OK
and remove memory card."
4. Touch the "OK" button.
The Control Panel is displayed.
Result
The HMI device data is now on the memory card.
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
6-12 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Procedure – Restore
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the "RESTORE" button.
The message "Restore started" is displayed.
The following message appears if no memory card is inserted in the card slot or if the
memory card is damaged:
Then perform steps 2 and 4.
2. Touch .
This message is displayed: "Restore aborted". Remove the memory card".
3. Remove the memory card.
4. Confirm with "OK".
The Control Panel is displayed again.
Repeat the procedure with a suitable memory card.
1. Using the memory card
2. Touch the "RESTORE" button.
This message is displayed: "Restore started". The following message appears: "Checking
data". When the data has been checked, the following message appears: "You are
starting a restore. All files files except those on the memory card and the registry files will
be deleted. Are you sure?"
3. Press "Yes" if you want to restore the data.
Press "No" if you want to cancel the restore.
The messages "Deleting files in the internal Flash memory" and "Restoring CE image"
are displayed in sequence once the restore process begins. A progress bar shows the
status of the process.
The restore ends with the message "The restore of the CE images is completed. The HMI
device will now be restarted. Do not remove the memory card."
4. Touch the "OK" button.
The operating system boots, opening the Loader and Control Panel in sequence. Two
messages appear.
Then the final message appears: "Restore successfully completed. Touch OK and
remove memory card."
5. Touch the "OK" button.
The HMI device boots. The Control Panel is then displayed.
6. Remove the memory card, if necessary.
Store the memory card in a safe place.
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 6-13
Result
The data from the memory card is now in the HMI device. The existing licenses are retained
on the HMI device, all other files have been deleted.
6.2.7 Setting the date and time
Requirements
The "Date/Time Properties" dialog has been opened with the "Date/Time Properties"
icon.
Figure 6-9 "Date/Time Properties" dialog
Time zone
Time
Date
"Summertime" checkbox
Button for saving changes
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
6-14 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the appropriate time zone for the HMI device in the "Time Zone" selection field.
Touch the selection field. A selection list is displayed.
2. Press "Apply".
The time of day shown in the "Current Time" field is adjusted correspondingly to the
selected time zone.
3. Set the date.
Touch the desired date on the calendar.
4. Set the current time of day in the "Current Time" input field.
Touch the input field. The alphanumerical screen keyboard is displayed.
5. If you want the change from standard time to daylight savings time to be performed
automatically:
Activate the "Daylight savings time currently in effect" check box.
6. Press "Apply".
The values you have set are now in effect.
7. Close the dialog and save your entries with .
Touch to discard the entries.
Notice
Reboot the HMI device if you have made changes to the time zone.
Result
The settings for the data and time of day have now been changed.
Synchronizing the Date and Time with the Controller
The date and time of the HMI device can be synchronized with the controller, if this has been
configured in the project and the controller program..
Further information on this subject is available in the "WinCC flexible" system manual.
Notice
Synchronize the date and time when time-controlled responses should be triggered in the
PLC by the HMI device.
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 6-15
6.2.8 Saving tab entries
Introduction
If you are running your own programs on the HMI device under MS Windows CE, you should
back up the registry information after installing the programs. There are several ways to save
files:
Save the registry information to the Flash memory.
Save files in a temporary folder to the Flash memory.
Saving to the Flash memory allows you to automatically restore the file system on the HMI
device.
Requirements
The "OP Properties" dialog has been opened with the "OP" icon.
Figure 6-10 "OP Properties" dialog, "Persistent Storage" tab
Saves the current registry information to the Flash memory. The HMI device loads the saved
registry information the next time it boots.
Button for saving registry information
Button for saving temporary files
Saves all the files in temporary storage to the Flash memory (for example, from the "Program
Files" directory). These files are written back the next time the HMI device starts. The "\Temp"
directory is not saved.
Check box for automatically restoring the file system on the memory card when the HMI
device starts up and when a memory card is inserted.
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
6-16 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the "Save Registry" button to save the current registry settings.
2. Touch the "Save Files" button to save temporary files.
3. Specify whether or not the file system on the memory card should be restored when the
HMI device starts up or when a memory card is inserted.
Activate the check box "Automatically Repair ...", if you wish to have the files system
restored automatically.
Deactivate the check box "Automatically Repair ...", if you wish to have the files
system restored only upon prompting.
4. Close the dialog and save your entries with . Touch to discard the entries.
Result
The HMI device uses the saved registry information the next time it starts. The temorary files
are copied back.
6.2.9 Modifying the screen contrast
Requirements
The "OP Properties" dialog has been opened with the "OP" icon.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. From the "OP Properties" dialog, select the "Display" tab.
Figure 6-11 "OP Properties" dialog, "Display" tab
Button for increasing the contrast
Button for reducing contrast
2. To adjust the screen contrast:
Touch the "UP" button to increase screen contrast
Touch the "DOWN" button to reduce screen contrast
3. Close the dialog and save your entries with . Touch to discard the entries.
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 6-17
Result
The HMI device screen settings have now been changed.
Note
You can also adjust the contrast within an open project. Refer to the corresponding system
documentation for more information in this regard.
6.2.10 Displaying information about the HMI
Requirements
The "OP" icon on the Control Panel has been touched.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the "OP Properties" dialog, then select the "Device" tab.
Figure 6-12 "OP Properties" dialog, "Device" tab , example
HMI device name
Version of the HMI device image
Version of the boot loader
Boot loader release date
Size of the Flash memory in which the HMI device image and project are stored
MAC address of the HMI device
Command button for restating the HMI device
2. The device-specific information is displayed in the "Device" tab.
This information is required when you contact A&D Technical Support.
3. Activate the "Reboot" command button if you want to reboot the HMI device
After you have activated the "Reboot" command button, a warning is displayed on the
screen. If you acknowledge this with "OK", the HMI device is rebooted immediately.
4. Use or to close the dialog when the information is no longer required.
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
6-18 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Caution
Data loss when the HMI device is restarted
All volatile data is lost when the HMI device is rebooted. No check is carried out whether
or not the project on the HMI device is running, the communication is active whether data
are currently being written into the flash memory or not.
Note
The size of the internal flash memory does not correspond to the available working
memory for a project.
6.2.11 Calibrating the touch screen
Introduction
Depending on the mounting position and viewing angle, it is possible that parallax may occur
when operating the HMI device. In order to prevent any operating errors as a result, calibrate
the touch screen again in the startup phase or during runtime.
Requirements
The "OP Properties" dialog has been opened with the "OP" icon.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the "OP Properties" dialog, then select the "Touch" tab.
Figure 6-13 "OP Properties" dialog, "Touch" tab
If the HMI device does not react precisely to a touch, the touch screen may require
calibration.
Button for calibrating the touch screen
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 6-19
2. Touch the "Recalibrate" button.
The following dialog appears.
&DUHIXOO\SUHVVDQGEUHLIO\KROGVW\OXVRQWKHFHQWHURI
WKHWDUJHW5HSHDWDVWKHWDUJHWPRYHVDURXQGWKHVFUHHQ
Carefully press the middle of the calibration crosshairs. Repeat the process as long as the
calibration crosshairs move on the touch screen.
Calibration crosshairs
3. Briefly touch the calibration crosshairs.
The calibration crosshairs then goes to four more positions. Touch the middle of the
calibration crosshairs for each position. If you do not touch the middle of the calibration
crosshairs, the procedure is repeated.
Once you have touched the calibration crosshairs for all positions, the following dialog
appears:
New calibration settings have been measured.
Tape the screen to register saved data.
Wait for 30 seconds to cancel saved data and
keep the current setting.
Time limit: 30 sec
The new calibration values are measured. Touch the touch screen to save the calibration
values. If you do not within touch the screen within 30 seconds, the new calibration values
will be discarded.
Time remaining until the calibration values are discarded
4. Touch the screen within 30 seconds
The new calibration is saved. If you wait longer than 30 seconds, the new calibration is
discarded and the original calibration remains in effect.
5. Close the dialog with .
The Control Panel is displayed.
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
6-20 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Result
The HMI device touch screen is now recalibrated.
6.2.12 Changing the password properties
Introduction
You can protect the Control Panel and Windows CE taskbar with a password.
Requirements
The "Password Properties" dialog has been opened with the "Password" icon.
Figure 6-14 "Password Properties" dialog
Password input field
Input field for entering the password a second time
Procedure – Entering a Password
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter a password in the "Password" input field.
Touch the input field. The alphanumerical screen keyboard is displayed.
2. Repeat the password entry in the "Confirm Password" input field.
3. Close the dialog with .
Notice
The password may not contain space characters or the special characters * ? . % / \ ' ".
Result
You cannot open the Control Panel or Windows CE taskbar without entering a password.
Notice
If the password is no longer available, you cannot make changes in the Control Panel or use
the Windows CE taskbar unless you update the operating system.
All data on the HMI device will be overwritten when you update the operating system.
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 6-21
Procedure – Deleting a Password
Proceed as follows:
1. Delete the entries for "Password" and "Confirm Password".
2. Close the dialog with .
Result
Password protection for the Control Panel and Windows CE taskbar is disabled.
6.2.13 Changing the printer properties
Introduction
HMI devices with a PROFINET interface can print via network printers. You can print
hardcopies and logs on a network printer. Spontaneous printing out of coming or going
individual messages is not possible.
Requirements
The "Printer Properties" dialog has been opened with the "Printer" symbol.
Figure 6-15 "Printer Properties" dialog box, example
Printer selection field
Interface
Network address of the printer
Paper format selection box
Orientation setting
Print quality setting
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
6-22 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Activate the "Printer Language" selection box and select the printer.
2. Activate the "Ports" selection box and set the "Network:" to On
3. Enter the network address of the printer in the "Network:" input box
Touch the input box. The screen keyboard is displayed
4. Activate the "Paper Size" input box and select the paper format.
5. Activate the corresponding radio button in the "Orientation" group:
"Portrait" for vertical format
"Landscape" for horizontal format
6. Set the print quality.
Activate the "Draft Mode" check box if you want to print out in draft quality
De-activate the "Draft Mode" check box if you want to print out in better quality
7. Set the color mode
Activate the "Color" check box if you want to print out in color. When de-activated, the
printout is in black-and-white
8. Close the dialog and save your values with . Touch to discard the values.
Result
The settings for the printer are modified.
Note
The list of current printers and the required settings for operator control devices can be
found on the Internet at: http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/en/11376409.
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 6-23
6.2.14 Changing regional settings
Introduction
The display format of the date, time and decimal point etc. differ from region to region. You
can adjust the regional settings on the HMI device to meet local requirements.
Requirements
The "Regional Settings Properties" dialog has been opened with the "Regional Settings"
icon.
Figure 6-16 "Regional Settings" dialog, "Regional" tab
Procedure - Changing Regional Settings
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the "Region" selection field for the language in the "Regional Settings" tab.
2. Select the desired language.
To do this, touch the input field. The symbolic screen keyboard is displayed.
Procedure - Changing the Number Format
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the "Number" tab.
2. Set the following in the selection fields:
The character for the decimal separator
The character for the thousand separator
The separator character for number sequences
3. Touch the respective selection field and set the desired value using the screen keyboard.
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
6-24 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Procedure - Changing the Time Format
1. Open the "Time" tab.
2. Set the following in the selection fields:
Time of day format
Define the separator between hours, minutes and seconds.
The format for the time before 12:00 noon.
The format for the time after 12:00 noon.
3. Touch the respective selection field and set the desired value using the screen keyboard.
Procedure - Changing the Date Format
1. Open the "Date" tab.
2. Set the following in the selection fields:
Define the separator between year, month and day.
The abbreviated format of the date
The full format of the date
3. Touch the respective selection field and set the desired value using the screen keyboard.
Procedure - Closing the Dialog
1. Close the dialog and save your entries with .
Touch to discard the entries.
Result
The regional settings for the HMI device screen have now been changed.
6.2.15 Changing MPI/DP settings – only at Mobile Panel 177 DP
Requirements
The "S7 Transfer Settings" dialog has been opened with the "S7 Transfer" icon.
Figure 6-17 "S7-Transfer Settings" dialog
Network selection
Button for opening the properties dialog
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 6-25
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select a network and then touch the "Properties" button.
One of the two following dialogs is displayed.
Figure 6-18 "MPI" dialog
Figure 6-19 "PROFIBUS" dialog
The HMI device is the only master on the bus.
Bus address of the HMI device
Time-out
Data transmission rate in total network
Highest station address in the network
Profile
Button for displaying the bus parameters
2. If more masters are connected to the bus, deactivate the check box "Panel is the only
master on the bus".
3. Enter the bus address for the HMI device in the "Address" input field.
Touch the input field. A selection list is displayed.
4. Select the highest transmission rate from the "Transmission rate" selection field.
Touch the input field. The symbolic screen keyboard is displayed.
5. Select the highest station address on the bus in the "Highest Station Address" field.
Touch the input field. The symbolic screen keyboard is displayed.
6. Select the desired profile from the "Profile" selection field. Touch the input field. The
symbolic screen keyboard is displayed.
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
6-26 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
7. The profile information is displayed when you press the "Bus Parameters" button in the
PROFIBUS dialog. This dialog is read-only.
Figure 6-20 Profile parameters
Press or to close the dialog.
8. Close the dialog and save your entries with . Touch to discard the entries.
Notice
Address in MPI/PROFIBUS DP Network
The value assigned in the "Address" input field may only be used once in a
MPI/PROFIBUS DP network.
Bus Parameters in the MPI/PROFIBUS DP Network
The bus parameters must be the same for all stations in the MPI/PROFIBUS DP network.
Note
When a project is opened, the MPI/DP settings are overwritten with the values from the
project.
General information
Notice
Transfer Mode Using MPI/PROFIBUS DP
For MPI/PROFIBUS DP transfer, the bus parameters, for example the MPI/PROFIBUS DP
address of the HMI device, are read from the current project on the HMI device.
The settings for MPI/PROFIBUS DP transfer can be modified. For this, you must first close
the project and then change the settings on the HMI device. Then go back to Transfer mode.
The HMI device uses the new MPI/PROFIBUS DP settings until you start a project or
transfer a project to it. The MPI/PROFIBUS DP settings are then overwritten by the values
from this project.
Transfer Settings
A project can only be transferred from the configuration computer to the HMI device when at
least one of the data channels is enabled on the HMI device.
Do not edit the transfer settings while a project is active or the HMI device is in transfer
mode.
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 6-27
Result
The MPI/DP settings of the HMI device have been changed.
6.2.16 Setting the delay
Introduction
The project is opened following a delay time when the HMI device is switched on. The
Loader is displayed during the delay time.
Requirements
The "Transfer Settings" dialog has been opened with the "Transfer" icon.
You have opened the "Directories" tab.
Figure 6-21 "Transfer Settings" dialog, "Directories" tab
Directory where the project file is saved
Directory where the compressed source file of your project are saved
The external memory card or the network connection can be defined as the storage location.
During the next backup process, the project's source file is stored in the specified location.
Storage location and initialization file of the HMI device for process mode
Selection field for the delay time
Notice
Settings in "Project File" and "Path"
Do not change the settings in the "Project File" and "Path" fields when working with a
project. The project may not open at the next start of the HMI if changes are made here.
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
6-28 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Procedure - Setting the Delay Time
1. Touch the "Wait [sec]" section field.
A selection list is displayed. Select the desired delay time.
With the value "0", the project starts immediately. It is then no longer possible to call the
Loader after switching on the HMI device. If you still wish to access the Loader, an
operator control must be configured to close the project.
2. Close the dialog and save your entries with . Touch to discard the entries.
Result
The delay time for the HMI device is now set.
6.2.17 Setting the screen saver
Introduction
You can set a period of time for automatic activation of the screen saver on the HMI device.
The screen saver is automatically activated if the HMI device is not operated within the
specified period of time.
The screen saver is deactivated when any key is pressed or the touch screen is touched.
The function assigned to that key is not triggered.
Requirements
The "Screen Saver" dialog has been opened with the "Screen Saver" icon.
Figure 6-22 "Screen saver" dialog
Period of time in minutes before the screen is activated
Screen saver setting
Enter '0' to disable the screen saver. The minimum value is 5 and the maximum value is
71582 minutes.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the number of minutes before the screen saver is to be activated.
Touch the input field. A selection list is displayed. "0" disables the screen saver.
2. Select either the standard screen saver or an empty screen.
Activate the "Standard" check box to enable the screen saver.
Activate the "Blank Screen" check box to enable a blank screen as the screen saver.
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 6-29
3. Close the dialog and save your entries with . Touch to discard the entries.
Notice
Activating the Screen Saver
You should always activate the screen saver. Otherwise, the screen contents may leave
a burn-in effect in the background if they appear too long.
This effect is reversible, however.
Result
The screen saver for the HMI device has now been set.
6.2.18 Displaying the system information
Requirements
The "System Properties" dialog has been opened with the "System" icon.
Procedure - Displaying System Information
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the "General" tab.
The system information is displayed. This dialog is read-only.
Figure 6-23 "System Properties" dialog, "General" tab
Copyright to Microsoft Windows CE
Information about the processor, amount of the internal Flash memory, and capacity of a
memory card when inserted
2. Close the dialog with or .
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
6-30 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Procedure - Displaying Memory Information
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the "Memory" tab.
The memory information is displayed.
Figure 6-24 "System Properties" dialog, "Memory" tab
2. Close the dialog with or .
Notice
"Memory" Tab
Do not change the amount of memory in the "Memory" tab.
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 6-31
6.2.19 Configuring the data channel
Introduction
If you block all data channels, the HMI device is protected against unintentional overwriting
of the project data and HMI device image.
Requirements
The "Transfer Settings" dialog has been opened with the "Transfer" icon.
Figure 6-25 "Transfer Settings" dialog, "Channel" tab
Group for data channel 1 (Channel 1)
Group for data channel 2 (Channel 2)
Button for the "MPI/DP - Transfer Settings" dialog or "Network Configuration"
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
6-32 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Configure the data channel that you want to use.
Activate the respective data channel with the "Enable Channel" check box in the
"Channel 1" or "Channel 2" group. In the "Channel 1" group, the RS -485 interface is
configured for the serial data transfer.
Activate the "Enable Channel" check box to enable the data channel.
Deactivate the "Enable Channel" check box to lock the data channel.
2. Configure automatic transfer.
Deactivate the "Remote Control" check box to disable automatic transfer.
Activate the "Remote Control" check box to enable automatic transfer.
Warning
Unintentional Transfer Mode
Ensure that the configuration computer does not inadvertently switch the HMI device to
Transfer mode during ongoing operation. This could cause unintentional actions to be
triggered in the plant.
3. Enter the required protocol for "Channel 2".
Touch the input field. A selection list is displayed.
4. Touch the "Advanced" button.
Applies to the "MPI/PROFIBUS DP" protocol:
Touch the "Advanced" button if you wish to switch to the "S7 Transfer Settings"
dialog. You can change the settings for MPI/PROFIBUS DP there.
Close the "S7 Transfer Settings" dialog with after making the changes.
Applies to the "ETHERNET" protocol:
Touch the "Advanced" button if you wish to switch to the "Network Configuration"
dialog. You can change the settings for TCP/IP there.
Close the "Network Configuration" dialog with after making the changes.
5. Close the "Transfer Settings" dialog and save your entries with . Touch to discard
the entries.
Result
The data channel is configured.
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 6-33
General information
Note
Making Changes in "Transfer" Mode
If the HMI device is in "Transfer" mode while changes are made to the transfer settings, the
settings only go into effect after the transfer function is restarted. This may occur if the
Control Panel is opened to change the transfer properties in an active project.
Notice
Transfer Mode via Channel 2
The bus parameters, such as the address of the HMI device, are read from the project
currently loaded on the HMI device.
You can change the settings for the transfer via Channel 2. For this, you must first close the
project and then change the settings on the HMI device. Then go back to "Transfer" mode.
The next time the project is started on the HMI device, the settings will be overwritten by the
values from the project.
Transfer Settings
A project can only be transferred from the configuration computer to the HMI device when at
least one of the data channels is enabled on the HMI device.
See also
Changing the internet settings only at Mobile Panel 177 PN (Page 6-40)
Changing MPI/DP settings – only at Mobile Panel 177 DP (Page 6-24)
6.2.20 Configuring network operation
6.2.20.1 Overview
Introduction
The HMI device with a PROFINET interface can be connected to a TCP/IP network.
Connection to a TCP/IP network can offer the following advantages:
Printing via a network printer
Saving recipe records to a server
Exporting recipe records
Importing recipe records
Transferring a project
Backing up data
These advantages are not available with a direct PC connection. However, peripherals
connected to the PC can be used. For example, you can use a local printer for printing.
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
6-34 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Notice
The HMI device can only be used in TCP/IP and PROFINET networks.
The HMI device only has client functionality in the PC network. This means that users can
access files of a subscriber with TCP/IP server functionality from the HMI device via the
network. However, it is not possible to access files on the HMI device via the network from a
PC.
Note
Information on communication using SIMATIC S7 via PROFINET is provided in the
"WinCC flexible Communication" user manual.
Requirements
Within a TCP/IP or PROFINET network, computers are addressed using network names.
These network names are translated from a DNS or WINS server to TCP/IP and PROFINET
addresses. Direct addressing via TCP/IP and PROFINET addresses is also supported by the
operating system. This is why a DNS or WINS server is needed for addressing via device
name names when the HMI device is in a TCP/IP or PROFINET network. Appropriate
servers are available in common TCP/IP and PROFINET networks. Consult your network
administrator if you have questions in this regard.
Printing via a Network Printer
The HMI device's operating system does not support the direct alarm logging via a network
printer. All other printer functions, such as printing hardcopies or logs, are possible via the
network without restriction.
General Procedure for Configuring the Network
The HMI device must be appropriately configured before setting into network operation. The
configuration is basically divided into the following steps:
Set device name of the HMI device.
Configure the network address.
Set the logon information.
Save the settings.
Switch off the HMI device once the network is configured.
If your network address is assigned automatically:
Before switching the HMI device on, insert the network cable in the corresponding
interface so that a unique IP address for the HMI device can be assigned during startup.
Switch on the HMI device.
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 6-35
Preparation
Before beginning the configuration, request the following network parameters from your
network administrator.
Does the network use DHCP for dynamic assignment of network addresses?
If not, get a new TCP/IP network address for the HMI device.
What is the TCP/IP address of the default gateway?
If a DNS network is used, what is the address of the name server?
If a WINS network is used, what is the address of the name server?
6.2.20.2 Setting the computer name of the HMI device
Requirements
The "Communication Properties" dialog box has been opened with the "Communications"
symbol.
Figure 6-26 "Communications Properties" dialog, "Device Name" tab register
The HMI device uses this information to identify itself to other PCs.
Computer name of the HMI device
Description for the HMI device (optional)
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the computer name of the HMI device in the "Device name" input box.
Touch the input field. The screen keyboard is displayed.
2. Enter a description of the HMI device in the "Device description" input box.
Touch the input field. The screen keyboard is displayed.
3. Close the dialog and save your entries with . Touch to discard the entries.
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
6-36 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Result
The computer name for the HMI device is set.
Note
Change the computer name in the "Device name" input box in order to activate the network
functionality.
6.2.20.3 Activating the direct connection
Requirements
The "Communications Properties" dialog has been opened with the "Communications"
icon.
Figure 6-27 "Communications Properties" dialog, "PC Connection" tab register
These settings control the connection between the HMI device and a desktop computer.
Enabling a direct connection
Button for changing the desktop computer
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the "PC Connection" tab.
The information about the direct connection is displayed.
2. Close the dialog with .
Notice
"PC Connection" Tab
If you want to operate a project on the HMI device, do not change the information in the
"PC Connection" tab.
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 6-37
6.2.20.4 Changing the network configuration
Requirements
The "Network Configuration" dialog has been opened with the "Network" icon.
Figure 6-28 "Network Configuration" dialog, "Adapters" tab , example
Selection for PROFINET adapters
MAC address of the HMI device
Button for the properties dialog
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch " SMSC100FD1: Onboard LAN Ethernet Driver"
2. Touch the "Properties" button.
The "Onboard LAN Ethernet Driver" dialog is displayed.
Figure 6-29 "Onboard LAN Ethernet Driver" dialog, "IP Address" tab
Address assignment
Input field for the IP address
Input field for the address of the subnet mask
Input field for the address of the default gateway
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
6-38 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
3. Select either automatic address assignment via DHCP or manual address assignment
4. If you set the address yourself, use the screen keyboard enter the respective addresses
in the input fields for "IP Address", "Subnet Mask" and, if used, "Default Gateway".
5. If a name server (DNS) is used in the network, open the "Name Server" tab.
The "Name Servers" tab of the "Onboard LAN Ethernet Driver" dialog is displayed.
Figure 6-30 "Onboard LAN Ethernet Driver" dialog, "Name Servers" tab
6. Enter the respective addresses in the input fields using the screen keyboard.
7. Close the dialog and save your entries with . Touch to discard the entries.
Once you have applied the settings, you are prompted to reboot the HMI device.
8. When prompted, open the "Device" tab of the "OP Properties" dialog and reboot the HMI
device.
Result
The network parameters for the HMI device have now been set.
See also
Overview (Page 6-33)
Displaying information about the HMI (Page 6-17)
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 6-39
6.2.20.5 Changing the logon data
Requirements
The "Network Configuration" dialog has been opened with the "Network" icon.
Figure 6-31 "Network Configuration" dialog, "Identification" tab
Windows CE uses this information to gain access to the network resources. Enter the user
name, password and domain you have received from your administrator.
Input field for the user name
Password input field
Input field for the domain
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the user name in the "User name" input field.
2. Touch the input field. The screen keyboard is displayed.
3. Enter your password in the "Password" input field.
Touch the input field. The screen keyboard is displayed.
4. Enter the domain name in the "Domain" input field.
Touch the input field. The screen keyboard is displayed.
5. Close the dialog and save your entries with . Touch to discard the entries.
Result
The logon information has now been set.
See also
Overview (Page 6-33)
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
6-40 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
6.2.20.6 Changing the internet settings – only at Mobile Panel 177 PN
Requirements
The "WinCC flexible Internet Settings" dialog has been opened with the
"WinCC Internet Settings" icon.
Procedure - Changing E-mail Settings
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the "Email" tab.
Figure 6-32 "WinCC flexible Internet Settings" dialog, "Email" tab
Setting for the SMTP server
Name for the sender
E-mail account
2. Specify the SMTP server.
Activate the check box "Use the default of the project file" if you want to use the
SMTP server permanently configured in the project.
Deactivate the check box "Use the default of the project file" if you do not want to use
the SMTP server permanently configured in the project.
Touch the input field to enter the SMTP server. The screen keyboard is displayed.
3. Enter the name for the sender in the "Sender" input field.
Touch the input field. The screen keyboard is displayed.
4. Enter the e-mail account for your e-mail in the "Authentication" input field.
Touch the input field. The screen keyboard is displayed.
Some e-mail providers only allow you to send mail if you specify the e-mail account. The
"Authentication" field can remain empty if your e-mail provider allows you to send mail
without checking the account.
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 6-41
Procedure - Changing Proxy Settings
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the "Proxy" tab.
Figure 6-33 "WinCC flexible Internet Settings" dialog, "Proxy" tab
Check box for using a proxy server
Address of the proxy server
Port
2. Activate the check box "Use proxy server" if you want to use a proxy server.
3. If you use a proxy server:
Specify the address of the proxy server and the desired port. Touch the corresponding
input field. The screen keyboard is displayed.
4. Close the dialog and save your entries with . Touch to discard the entries.
Result
The Internet settings have now been changed.
Note
Options
Additional tabs may appear in the "WinCC Internet Settings" tab. This depends on the
options that have been enabled for network operation in the project.
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.
Configuring the operating system
6.2 Control Panel
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
6-42 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 7-1
Preparing and backing up a project 7
7.1 7.1 Overview
Configuration and Process Control Phases
HMI devices can be used to operate and monitor tasks in process and production
automation. The plant screens on the HMI devices are used to provide a clearer overview of
active processes. The HMI device project, which includes the plant screens, is created
during the configuration phase.
Once the project is transferred to the HMI device and the HMI device is connected to a PLC
in the automation system, processes can be operated and monitored in the process control
phase.
&RQQHFWLRQWRWKH3/&
7UDQVIHUSURMHFW
&RQWUROOHU
7HVWLQJDSURMHFW
6LPXODWHSURMHFW
%DFNXSSURMHFW
&XVWRP+0,GHYLFH
+0,'HYLFH 2SHUDWHSURMHFW
&RQILJXUDWLRQSKDVH
3URFHVVFRQWUROSKDVH
&UHDWHSURMHFW
&RQILJXUDWLRQFRPSXWHU
Figure 7-1 Configuration and process control phases
Preparing and backing up a project
7.1 Overview
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
7-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Transferring the Project to the HMI Device
The following can be performed to transfer a project to an HMI device:
Transfer the project from the configuration computer
Restore the project from a PC using ProSave
In this case, an archived project is transferred from a PC to the HMI device. The
configuration software need not be installed on this PC.
These procedures are available for commissioning and recommissioning a project.
Commissioning and Recommissioning
When the HMI device is commissioned there is no project at first.
The HMI device is also in this state after the operating system has been updated.
When recommissioning, any project on the HMI device is replaced.
7.1.1 Setting the operating mode
Operating Modes
Operating modes of the HMI device:
Offline
Online
Transfer
"Offline mode" and "Online mode" can be set on the configuration computer and on the HMI
device. To set these modes on the HMI device, use a corresponding operator control object
of the project.
Switching the Operating Mode
The configuration engineer must have configured an appropriate operator control object to
allow a change of the operating mode on the HMI device during ongoing operation.
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.
"Offline" Operating Mode
In this mode, there is no communication between the HMI device and PLC. Although the
HMI device can be operated, it cannot exchange data with the PLC.
"Online" Operating Mode
In this mode, the HMI device and PLC communicate. You can operate the plant on the HMI
device according to your system configuration.
Preparing and backing up a project
7.1 Overview
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 7-3
"Transfer" Operating Mode
In this mode, you can transfer a project from the configuration computer to the HMI device or
backup and restore HMI device data, for example.
The following options are available for setting "Transfer" mode on the HMI device:
When the HMI device starts up
Start "Transfer" mode manually in the HMI device Loader.
During ongoing operation
Start the "Transfer" mode manually within the project using an operator control object.
The HMI device toggles to "Transfer" mode when automatic mode is set and a transfer is
initiated on the configuration computer.
7.1.2 Reusing existing projects
You can reuse existing Mobile Panel 170 projects.
The following cases are possible:
1. Old project exists in ProTool
Migrate the project to WinCC flexible and then switch the HMI device.
2. Old project exists in WinCC flexible
Switch the HMI device in WinCC flexible.
For more information, please see the online help for WinCC flexible or the "WinCC flexible
Migration" user manual.
Preparing and backing up a project
7.1 Overview
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
7-4 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
7.1.3 Data transmission options
Overview
The table below shows the options of transferring data between the Mobile Panel 177 and a
configuration computer.
Type Type Mobile Panel 177 DP Mobile Panel 177 PN
Serial Yes Yes
MPI/PROFIBUS DP1) Yes
Backup
Ethernet 2) Yes
Serial Yes Yes
MPI/PROFIBUS DP1) Yes
Restore
Ethernet 2) Yes
Serial (with bootstrapping) Yes Yes
Serial Yes Yes
MPI/PROFIBUS DP1) Yes
Updating the
operating system
Ethernet 2) Yes
Serial Yes Yes
MPI/PROFIBUS DP1) Yes
Transferring a project
Ethernet 2) Yes
Serial Yes Yes
MPI/PROFIBUS DP1) Yes
Installing or
uninstalling an option
Ethernet 2) Yes
Serial Yes Yes
MPI/PROFIBUS DP1) Yes
Transferring
authorization in both
directions Ethernet 2) Yes
1) Applies for Mobile Panel 177 DP
2) Applies for Mobile Panel 177 PN
Note
Point-to-point coupling with a PC-PPI cable is necessary for serial transfer.
Preparing and backing up a project
7.2 Transfer
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 7-5
7.2 7.2 Transfer
7.2.1 Overview
Transfer
During transfer, the project is downloaded from the configuration computer to the HMI
device.
The "Transfer" mode can be started manually or automatically on the HMI device.
Transferred data is written directly to the flash memory on the HMI device. The transfer
function uses a data channel you need to configure before you initiate any transfers.
7.2.2 Starting the transfer manually
Introduction
You can set "Transfer" mode manually on the HMI device using a configured operator
control object and during ongoing operation.
Requirements
The *.hmi project is opened in WinCC flexible.
The HMI device is connected to a configuration computer.
The data channel is configured on the HMI device.
The HMI device Loader is opened.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to initiate the transfer:
1. Switch to "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
2. Proceed as follows on the configuration computer:
Select the "Project ▶Transfer ▶Transfer Settings" menu command in WinCC flexible.
Select the HMI device and define the parameters for the connection.
Start the download with "Transfer".
The configuration computer verifies its connection to the HMI device. If the connection is
not available or is faulty, the configuration computer outputs an alarm. If no
communication error is detected, the project is transferred to the HMI device.
Preparing and backing up a project
7.2 Transfer
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
7-6 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Result
When the transfer is completed successfully, the data can be found on the HMI device. The
transferred project is then started automatically.
See also
Setting the operating mode (Page 7-2)
Data transmission options (Page 7-4)
Configuring the data channel (Page 6-31)
7.2.3 Starting the transfer automatically
Introduction
The HMI device can be automatically switched to "Transfer" mode during runtime as soon as
transfer is started on the configuration computer connected.
Automatic startup is particularly suited for the test phase of a new project since transfer is
completed without interfering with the HMI device.
Automatic transfer is available for the following data channels:
MPI/PROFIBUS DP
PROFINET
Serial
Notice
If the automatic transfer has been activated on the HMI device and a transfer is initiated
on the configuration computer, the project currently running is automatically stopped. The
HMI device then automatically switches to "Transfer" mode.
After the commissioning phase, deactivate the automatic transfer so that the HMI device
cannot be inadvertently switched to Transfer mode. The transfer mode can trigger
unintentional actions in the device.
You can set a password for the Loader of the HMI device to restrict access to the transfer
settings and thus avoid unauthorized modifications.
Requirements
The *.hmi project is opened in WinCC flexible.
The HMI device is connected to a configuration computer.
The data channel is configured on the HMI device.
The automatic transfer is activated in the data channel for the transfer.
The project is started.
Preparing and backing up a project
7.2 Transfer
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 7-7
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. In WinCC flexible, select the menu command "Project ▶ Transfer ▶ Transfer Settings".
2. Select the HMI device
3. Set the connection parameters
4. Start the transfer with "Transfer"
The connection to the HMI device is checked. If the connection is not available or
defective, the configuration computer issues the corresponding error message. In the
case of an error-free connection, the HMI device ends the running project and switches to
"Transfer" mode. The selected data is transferred to the HMI device.
Result
When the transfer has been completed successfully, the data can be found on the HMI
device. The transferred project is then started automatically.
See also
Data transmission options (Page 7-4)
Configuring the data channel (Page 6-31)
7.2.4 Testing a project
Introduction
There are two options on the HMI device testing a project:
Offline testing of the project
Offline testing means that communication between the HMI device and PLC is down
while the test is being carried out.
Online testing of the project
Online testing means that the HMI device and PLC communicate with each other during
testing.
Perform both tests, starting with the "Offline test", followed by the "Online test".
Note
You should always test the project on the HMI device on which the project will be used.
Check the following:
1. Check the correct layout of the screens.
2. Check the screen structure.
3. Check the input objects.
4. Enter the tag values.
The test increases the certainty that the project will run error-free on the HMI device.
Preparing and backing up a project
7.2 Transfer
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
7-8 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Requirements for Offline Testing
The project has been transferred to the HMI device.
The HMI device is in "Offline" mode.
Procedure
In "Offline" mode, you can test the various project functions on the HMI device without them
being affected by the PLC. PLC tags, therefore, are not updated.
Test the operator control objects and visualization of the project as far as possible without
connecting to the PLC.
Requirements of Online Testing
The project has been transferred to the HMI device.
The HMI device is in "Online" mode.
Procedure
In "Online" mode, you can test the various project functions on the HMI device without them
being affected by the PLC. PLC tags are updated in this case.
Test the operator control objects and views of the project.
See also
Setting the operating mode (Page 7-2)
Preparing and backing up a project
7.3 Backup and restore
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 7-9
7.3 7.3 Backup and restore
7.3.1 Overview
Introduction
Data located on the HMI device can be backed up using a PC external to the HMI device
and can be restored from it.
The following data in the internal Flash memory can be backed up and restored:
Project and HMI device image
Password list
recipe data
Note
Licenses
Backing up and restoring licenses is not necessary, since these are stored non-deletably
in the working memory of the HMI device.
Backup and restoring can be performed in the following ways:
WinCC flexible
ProSave
General information
Notice
Power failure
If an operation for restoring data is interrupted due to power failure on the HMI device, the
operating system of the HMI device may be deleted! The operating system then has to be
updated.
Compatibility conflict
If a message is output on the HMI device warning of a compatibility conflict during the
restore operation, the operating system must be updated.
Licenses
Licenses are excluded from backing up and restoring.
Preparing and backing up a project
7.3 Backup and restore
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
7-10 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
7.3.2 Backup and restore operations in WinCC flexible
Introduction
Backup and restore operations transfer the relevant data between flash memory on the HMI
device and a configuration computer.
Requirements
The HMI device is connected to a configuration computer.
No project is open in WinCC flexible.
The data channel is configured on the HMI device.
Procedure - Backup
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the menu command "Project ▶ Transfer ▶ Communication Settings" in
WinCC flexible on the configuration computer.
The "Communication Settings" dialog opens.
2. Select the HMI device type.
3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuration computer,
then set the communication parameters.
4. Close the dialog with "OK".
5. In WinCC flexible, select the menu command "Project ▶ Transfer ▶ Backup".
The "Backup Settings" dialog opens.
6. Select the data to be backed up.
7. Select a destination folder and a file name for the *.psb backup file.
8. Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device, the device automatically sets
"Transfer" mode when a backup is initiated.
9. Start the backup operation in WinCC flexible with "OK" on the configuration computer.
Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible.
A status view opens to indicate the progress of the operation.
Result
The system outputs a message when the backup is completed.
The relevant data is now backed up on the configuration computer.
Preparing and backing up a project
7.3 Backup and restore
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 7-11
Procedure - Restore
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the menu command "Project ▶ Transfer ▶ Communication Settings" in
WinCC flexible on the configuration computer.
The "Communication Settings" dialog opens.
2. Select the HMI device type.
3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuration computer,
then set the communication parameters.
4. Close the dialog with "OK".
5. In WinCC flexible, select the menu command "Project ▶ Transfer ▶ Restore".
The "Restore Settings" dialog opens.
6. Select the *.psb backup file to be restored from the "Open" dialog.
The view shows from which HMI device the backup file originates and the type of data it
contains.
7. Set the HMI device to the "Transfer" mode
If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device, the device automatically sets
"Transfer" mode when a restore operation is initiated.
8. Start the restore operation in WinCC flexible with "OK" on the configuration computer.
Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible.
A status view opens to indicate the progress of the operation.
Result
The transfer is completed when the backup data is restored from the configuration computer
to the HMI device.
See also
Overview (Page 7-9)
Data transmission options (Page 7-4)
Preparing and backing up a project
7.3 Backup and restore
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
7-12 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
7.3.3 Backup and restore operations using ProSave
Introduction
Backup and restore operations transfer the relevant data between flash memory on the HMI
device and a PC.
Requirements
The HMI device is connected to a PC on which ProSave is installed.
The data channel is configured on the HMI device.
Procedure - Backup
Proceed as follows:
1. From the Windows Start menu, run ProSave on the PC.
2. Select the HMI device type from the "General" tab.
3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuration computer,
then set the communication parameters.
4. Use the "Backup" tab to select the relevant data.
5. Select a destination folder and a file name for the *.psb backup file.
6. Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device, the device automatically sets
"Transfer" mode when a backup is initiated.
7. Start the backup operation in ProSave with "Start Backup".
Follow the instructions in ProSave.
A status view opens to indicate the progress of the operation.
Result
The system outputs a message when the backup is completed.
The relevant data is now backed up on the PC.
Preparing and backing up a project
7.3 Backup and restore
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 7-13
Procedure - Restore
Proceed as follows:
1. From the Windows Start menu, run ProSave on the PC.
2. Select the HMI device type from the "General" tab.
3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuration computer,
then set the communication parameters.
4. Select the *.psb backup file to be restored from the "Restore" tab.
The view shows from which HMI device the backup file originates and the type of data it
contains.
5. Set the HMI device to the "Transfer" mode
If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device, the device automatically sets
"Transfer" mode when a restore operation is initiated.
6. Start the restore operation in ProSave with "Start Restore".
Follow the instructions in ProSave.
A status view opens to indicate the progress of the operation.
Result
The transfer is completed when the backup data is restored from the PC to the HMI device.
See also
Overview (Page 7-9)
Data transmission options (Page 7-4)
Preparing and backing up a project
7.4 Updating the operating system
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
7-14 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
7.4 7.4 Updating the operating system
7.4.1 Overview
Overview
A compatibility conflict may occur when transferring a project to the HMI device. This is
caused by difference between the versions of the configuration software used and the HMI
device image available on the HMI device. If there are different versions, the configuration
computer cancels the transfer of the project with a message indicating a compatibility
conflict.
There are several ways to match the versions:
Update the HMI device image if the project was created with the most recent version of
the configuration software.
Load a previous version of the HMI device image if you do not want to adapt the loaded
project to the most recent version of the configuration software.
Notice
Data loss
An operating system update deletes all data such as projects, passwords and license
from the HMI device.
Data channels
An operating system update resets all parameters for the data channels. You then have
to configure the data channels again before starting a transfer in the Loader.
Bootstrapping
In ProSave or WinCC flexible, you can update the operating system with or without
bootstrapping, depending on the HMI device used.
Updating the operating system without bootstrapping
First, set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device or use the automatic transfer function if the
project is active. Then start the operating system update in ProSave or WinCC flexible.
Updating the operating system with bootstrapping
First, start the operating system update in ProSave or WinCC flexible. Then switch the
power on the HMI device off and on again.
Note
You have to perform an operating system update with bootstrapping if the HMI device
does not yet have an operating system or if the operating system of the HMI device is
corrupt.
Point-to-point coupling with a PC-PPI cable is necessary in order to update the operating
system with bootstrapping.
In ProSave or WinCC flexible, set the "Bootstrap" check box status according to your
selected operating system update mode.
Preparing and backing up a project
7.4 Updating the operating system
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 7-15
7.4.2 Updating the Operating System Using WinCC flexible
Requirements
The HMI device is connected to a configuration computer.
No project is open in WinCC flexible.
Relevant only to operating system update without bootstrapping:
The data channel is configured on the HMI device.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Relevant to operating system update with bootstrapping:
Switch off power to the HMI device.
2. Select the menu command "Project ▶ Transfer ▶ Communication Settings" in WinCC
flexible on the configuration computer.
This opens the "Communication Settings" dialog.
3. Select the HMI device type.
4. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuration computer,
then set the communication parameters.
5. Close the dialog with "OK".
6. In WinCC flexible, select the menu command "Project ▶ Transfer ▶ Update operating
system".
7. Select whether to update the operating system with/without bootstrapping by setting the
"Bootstrap" check box accordingly.
8. In "Image path," select the folder which contains the HMI device image file, *.img.
The HMI device image files are available under "WinCC flexible Images" in the
WinCC flexible installation folder and on the corresponding WinCC flexible installation
CD.
9. Select "Open".
In the output area, you are provided information on the version of the HMI device image
file after it is opened.
10. Applies only when updating without bootstrapping:
Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device, the device automatically sets
"Transfer" mode when an update is initiated.
11. In WinCC flexible, select "Update OS" to run the operating system update.
12. Applies only when updating with bootstrapping:
Switch on the power supply to the HMI device.
13. Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible.
A status view opens to indicate progress.
Preparing and backing up a project
7.4 Updating the operating system
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
7-16 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Result
The system outputs and alarm when the operating system update is completed.
This operation has deleted the project data from the HMI device.
7.4.3 Updating the operating system in ProSave
Requirements
The HMI device is connected to a PC on which ProSave is installed.
When updating the operating system without bootstrapping:
The data channel is configured on the HMI device.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. When updating the operating system with bootstrapping:
Switch off power to the HMI device.
2. From the Windows Start menu, run ProSave on the PC.
3. Select the HMI device type from the "General" tab.
4. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuration computer,
then set the communication parameters.
5. Open the "OS Update" tab.
6. Select whether to update the operating system with/without bootstrapping by setting the
"Bootstrap" check box accordingly.
7. In "Image path," select the folder which contains the HMI device image file, *.img.
The HMI device image file is available on the corresponding WinCC flexible installation
CD and in the installation directory of WinCC flexible.
8. Select "Open".
In the output area, you are provided information on the version of the HMI device image
file after it is opened.
9. When updating without bootstrapping:
Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device, the device automatically sets
"Transfer" mode when an update is initiated.
10. Start the update of the operating system on the PC with "Update OS".
11. Applies only when updating with bootstrapping:
Switch on the power supply to the HMI device.
12. Follow the instructions in ProSave.
A status view opens to indicate progress.
Preparing and backing up a project
7.5 Installing and uninstalling options
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 7-17
Result
The system outputs and alarm when the operating system update is completed.
This operation has deleted the project data from the HMI device.
7.5 7.5 Installing and uninstalling options
7.5.1 Overview
Options
You can install options on for the HMI device, for example, additional programs developed
especially for the HMI device.
You can also remove options from the HMI device.
Note
A license key may be need to run an option. The license key unlocks the option for use.
7.5.2 Installing and uninstalling options via WinCC flexible
Requirements
The HMI device is connected to a configuration computer.
No project is open in WinCC flexible.
The data channel is configured on the HMI device.
Procedure – Installing an Option
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the menu command "Project ▶ Transfer ▶ Communication Settings" in WinCC
flexible on the configuration computer.
The "Communication Settings" dialog opens.
2. Select the HMI device type.
3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuration computer,
then set the communication parameters.
4. Close the dialog with "OK".
5. In WinCC flexible, select the menu command "Project ▶ Transfer ▶ Options".
Preparing and backing up a project
7.5 Installing and uninstalling options
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
7-18 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
6. Select the desired option under "Available options."
7. Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device, the device automatically sets
"Transfer" mode when the installation of an option is initiated.
8. Start the installation of the option in WinCC flexible on the configuration computer with
Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible.
A status display appears indicating the progress of the installation.
Result
The option has now been installed on the HMI device.
Procedure – Removing an Option
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the menu command "Project ▶ Transfer ▶ Communication Settings" in WinCC
flexible on the configuration computer.
The "Communication Settings" dialog opens.
2. Select the HMI device type.
3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuration computer,
then set the communication parameters.
4. Close the dialog with "OK".
5. In WinCC flexible, select the menu command "Project ▶ Transfer ▶ Options".
6. Select the desired option under "Installed options."
7. Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device, the device automatically sets
"Transfer" mode when the removal of an option is initiated.
8. Start the removal of the option in WinCC flexible on the configuration computer with
Follow the instructions in WinCC flexible.
A status display appears indicating the progress of the removal.
Result
The option has now been removed on the HMI device.
See also
Setting the operating mode (Page 7-2)
Overview (Page 7-17)
Configuring the data channel (Page 6-31)
Data transmission options (Page 7-4)
Preparing and backing up a project
7.5 Installing and uninstalling options
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 7-19
7.5.3 Installing and uninstalling options via ProSave
Requirements
The HMI device is connected to a PC on which ProSave is installed.
The data channel is configured on the HMI device.
Procedure – Installing an Option
Proceed as follows:
1. From the Windows Start menu, run ProSave on the PC.
2. Select the HMI device type from the "General" tab.
3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuration computer,
then set the communication parameters.
4. Open the "Options" tab.
5. Select the desired option under "Available options."
6. Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device, the device automatically sets
"Transfer" mode when the installation of an option is initiated.
7. Start the installation of the option in ProSave with
Follow the instructions in ProSave.
A status display appears indicating the progress of the installation.
Result
The option has now been installed on the HMI device.
Procedure – Removing an Option
Proceed as follows:
1. From the Windows Start menu, run ProSave on the PC.
2. Select the HMI device type from the "General" tab.
3. Select the type of connection between the HMI device and the configuration computer,
then set the communication parameters.
4. Open the "Options" tab.
5. Select the desired option under "Installed options."
6. Set "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
If automatic transfer mode is enabled on the HMI device, the device automatically sets
"Transfer" mode when the removal of an option is initiated.
7. Start the removal of the option in ProSave with
Follow the instructions in ProSave.
A status display appears indicating the progress of the removal.
Preparing and backing up a project
7.6 Transferring license keys in both directions
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
7-20 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Result
The option has now been removed on the HMI device.
See also
Overview (Page 7-17)
Configuring the data channel (Page 6-31)
Setting the operating mode (Page 7-2)
Data transmission options (Page 7-4)
7.6 7.6 Transferring license keys in both directions
7.6.1 Overview
License Keys
With the purchase of a optional package, you obtain a specific user license with an
associated license key. Once you have installed an option, transfer a license key to the HMI
device. The license key unlocks the option for use.
You can also transfer the license key from the HMI device back to a license diskette.
Note
License keys can only be transfered back and forth with the Automation License Manager
and WinCC flexible.
7.6.2 Transfering License Keys and Transfering Them Back
Introduction
You can transfer license keys stand-alone with the Automation License Manager or from
within WinCC flexible.
If you want to transfer license keys from WinCC flexible, start the Automation License
Manager from within a project. You then no longer need to perform the general settings such
as HMI device and connection selection, since these settings are transferred from the
project.
Preparing and backing up a project
7.6 Transferring license keys in both directions
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 7-21
Requirements
The HMI device is connected to a configuration computer.
When transferring back and forth using WinCC flexible:
No project is open in WinCC flexible.
The data channel is configured on the HMI device.
The license diskette with the license key to be transferred must be inserted in the floppy
drive of the configuration computer.
Procedure – Transferring a License Key
Proceed as follows:
1. Switch to "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
2. When transferring using WinCC flexible:
Select "Project ► Transfer ► Authorizations...".
3. When transferring using the Automation License Manager:
Start the Automation License Manager via "Start ► Simatic ► License Management ►
Automation License Manager."
4. Select "Edit ► Connect Target System ► Connect HMI Device."
The "Connect Target System" dialog appears.
5. Under "Device Type," select the appropriate device type.
6. Under "Connection," select the type of connection.
Depending on the type of connection selected, the appropriate fields for the connection
settings appear under "Connection parameters."
7. Select the required connection parameters and click "OK."
The connection to the HMI device is established. The connected HMI device is displayed
in the left window of the Automation License Manager.
8. In the left window, select the source drive. The right window displays the available license
keys.
9. Drag one or more license keys from the right window and drop them on the HMI device in
the left window.
The license keys are then transferred to the HMI device.
Result
The license key has now been transferred from the license diskette to the HMI device.
Preparing and backing up a project
7.6 Transferring license keys in both directions
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
7-22 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Procedure – Transferring a License Key Back
Proceed as follows:
1. Switch to "Transfer" mode on the HMI device.
2. When transferring back using WinCC flexible:
Select "Project ► Transfer ► Authorizations...".
3. When transferring back using the Automation License Manager:
Start the Automation License Manager via "Start ► Simatic ► License Management ►
Automation License Manager."
4. Select "Edit ► Connect Target System ► Connect HMI Device."
The "Connect Target System" dialog appears.
5. Under "Device Type," select the appropriate device type.
6. Under "Connection," select the type of connection.
Depending on the type of connection selected, the appropriate fields for the connection
settings appear under "Connection parameters."
7. Select the required connection parameters and click "OK."
The connection to the HMI device is established. The connected HMI device is displayed
in the left window of the Automation License Manager.
8. In the left window, select the HMI device. The right window displays the available license
keys.
9. Drag one or more license keys from the right window and drop them on the destination
drive in the left window.
The license keys are then transferred back to the license diskette.
Result
The license key has now been transferred back from HMI device to the license diskette.
See also
Overview (Page 7-20)
Configuring the data channel (Page 6-31)
Setting the operating mode (Page 7-2)
Data transmission options (Page 7-4)
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 8-1
Operating a project 8
8.1 8.1 Overview
Using Operator Controls on the Touch Screen
Operator controls are touch-sensitive objects on the HMI screen such as buttons, I/O fields
and alarm windows. Touch objects are basically operated in the same way as mechanical
keys. You activate operator controls by touching them with your finger.
Some operations with the project may require in-depth knowledge about the specific plant on
the part of the operator. It is therefore important to take special care, for example, in
displaying typing. Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.
Caution
Always touch only one operator control on the screen. Never touch more than one operator
control at a time, otherwise you may trigger unintentional actions.
Caution
Do not use any pointed or sharp objects when operating the touch screen as this may
damage the plastic membrane of the touch screen.
Locking operator controls
The HMI provides optical feedback when it detects that an operator control has been
touched. This feedback is independent of any communication with the PLC. Therefore, this
feedback does not indicate whether the relevant action is actually executed or not.
The configuration engineer may also have configured the feedback function in a different
manner. Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.
Operating a project
8.1 Overview
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
8-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Optical Feedback from Operator Controls
The type of optical feedback depends on the operator control object:
Buttons
The HMI outputs different views of the "Touched" and "Untouched" states, provided the
configuration engineer has configured a 3D effect:
"Touched" state:
"Untouched" state:
The configuration engineer defines the appearance of a selected field, for example, its
line width and color for the focus.
Invisible buttons
The focus for invisible buttons is not identified after selection by default. No optical
operation feedback is provided in this case.
The configuration engineer may, however, configure invisible buttons so that their outline
appears as lines when touched. This outline remains visible until the you select another
operator control object.
I/O fields
After you touch an I/O field, a screen keyboard appears as optical operation feedback.
Operating a project
8.2 Key operation
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 8-3
8.2 8.2 Key operation
Soft keys with global function assignment
A soft key with global function assignment always triggers the same action on the HMI
device or in the PLC, regardless of the current screen. An example of such an action is the
activation of a screen or the closing an alarm window.
Soft keys with local function assignment
A soft key with local function assignment is screen-specific and is therefore only effective
within the active screen.
The function assigned to a soft key can vary from screen to screen.
The soft key of a screen can be assigned one function only, either a global or local one. The
local assignment function takes priority over the global setting.
Soft Keys as System Keys for the OP 177B
Soft keys can also be configured as system keys. For example, they can function as the
numerical keypad, the cursor keypad or as a section of the alphanumerical keypad.
Multi-key operation
Unwanted actions may be triggered if the operator unintentionally actuates a key
combination.
Caution
Unintentional actions
In "Online" mode, simultaneous operation of more than two keys may cause unintentional
actions in the plant.
Never press more than two keys simultaneously.
Operating a project
8.3 Direct keys
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
8-4 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
8.3 8.3 Direct keys
Introduction
Direct keys on the HMI device are used to set bits in the I/O area of a SIMATIC S7.
This makes rapid key operations possible. For example, jog mode requires rapid operator
inputs using keys.
Notice
Direct keys are still active when the HMI device is in "offline" mode.
Notice
Removing the connecting cable
Take into account when removing the connecting cable that this corresponds to the failure of
a PROFIBUS DP slave or PROFINET slaves and therefore causes the controller to be
stopped.
Therefore, take appropriate programming measures in the PLC to prevent this from
occurring. For more detailed information, refer to the PLC manufacturer's documentation.
Note
Direct keys cause an additional base load of the HMI device.
Direct keys
The following objects can be configured as direct keys at a PROFIBUS DP coupling or
PROFINET coupling:
Buttons
Screens (building and removal)
Softkeys
Hand wheel
Illuminated pushbutton
Key-operated switch
Note
PROFINET direct keys are available as from WinCC flexible 2005 SP1.
Further information about direct keys is available in the system manual "WinCC flexible
communication".
Operating a project
8.4 Setting the project language
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 8-5
8.4 8.4 Setting the project language
Introduction
The HMI device supports multilingual projects. You need to configure a corresponding
operator control object which lets you change the language setting on the HMI device during
runtime.
The project always starts with the language set in the previous session.
Requirements
The relevant project language must be available on the HMI device.
The language changeover function must be logically linked to a configured operator
control object such as a button.
Selecting a language
You can change project languages at any time. Language-specific objects are immediately
output to the screen in the relevant language when you switch languages.
The following options are available for switching the language:
1. A configured operator control object switches from one project language to the next in a
list.
2. A configured operator control directly sets the desired project language.
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.
Operating a project
8.5 Entries and help within a project
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
8-6 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
8.5 8.5 Entries and help within a project
8.5.1 Overview
Procedure for Input Fields
Values are entered in the project input fields. The values are transferred from the input fields
to the PLC.
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the required input field on the screen.
The screen keyboard opens.
Based on your configuration, you can enter the following type of values in the input field:
Numerical
Alphanumerical
Symbolic
Date/time
2. Set the value.
3. Confirm the entry.
Screen keyboard
When you touch an input object such as an IO field on the HMI touch screen, a screen
keyboard appears. This screen keyboard is also displayed when it is necessary to enter a
password to access protected functions. The keyboard is automatically hidden again when
input is complete.
Based on the configuration of the input object, the system opens a screen keyboard for
entering numerical, alphanumerical or symbolic values.
Note
The screen keyboard display is independent of the configured project language.
Numerical values
You can enter numerical values character-by-character using the numerical screen keyboard
Formats for Numerical values
You can enter values in numerical input fields based on the following formats:
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Binary
Operating a project
8.5 Entries and help within a project
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 8-7
Limit value test of numerical values
Tags can be assigned limit values. The current limit values are indicated in the numerical
screen keyboard. If an Alarm window has been configured, a system message is
automatically output to indicate any violation of the configured input value limits. For
example, 80 exceeds the configured limit value of 78. The entered value is therefore rejected
and the original value is displayed again.
Decimal places for numerical values
If a numerical input field is configured for a specific number of decimal points, decimal places
in excess of the limit are ignored. Empty decimal places are filled with "0" after the number is
confirmed.
Alphanumerical values
Alphanumerical values (numbers and letters) can be entered character-by-character using
the alphanumerical screen keyboard.
Symbolic values
Symbolic values are entered from a list of predefined entries using the symbolic IO fields.
Date and time of day
You can enter date/time values character-by-character using the alphanumerical screen
keyboard
8.5.2 Entering and editing numerical values
Numerical screen keyboard
When you touch an IO field on the HMI touch screen, the numerical screen keyboard
appears. The keyboard is automatically hidden again when input is complete.
Figure 8-1 Numerical screen keyboard
Operating a project
8.5 Entries and help within a project
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
8-8 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Procedure
You can enter numerical and hexadecimal values character-by-character using the
numerical screen keyboard
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the relevant IO field on the screen.
The numerical screen keyboard opens and displays the current value.
2. Set the value.
You can only operate keys which are visualized in 3D format. The type of value to be
entered determines whether a key is enabled or disabled.
The following options for entering values are available:
The current value is deleted when you enter the first character. Enter the value again.
Use the and keys to move the cursor within the current value. You can now
edit the characters of the current value or add characters.
Use the key to delete the character to the left of the cursor.
Use the key to change the sign of the value.
Select to view the infotext of the IO field.
This key is only enabled if infotext or the current screen has been configured for the
input object.
3. Select to confirm your entries or cancel them with . Both actions close the
screen keyboard.
Note
Numerical IO fields
Numerical I/O fields can be assigned limit values. In this case, values are only accepted if
they lie within configured limits. Any entered values that are outside the range are
rejected. A system alarm is triggered on the HMI device in this case.
When the screen keyboard appears, the high and low limit values are indicated if
configured.
Opened screen keyboard
When the on-screen keyboard is open, PLC job 51, "Select Screen" has no function.
Language switching
Switching the language in the project has no effect on the numerical screen keyboard.
This is why Cyrillic characters cannot be input at this time.
Result
You have changed the numerical value or entered a new one.
Operating a project
8.5 Entries and help within a project
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 8-9
8.5.3 Entering and editing alphanumerical values
Alphanumerical Screen Keyboard
When you touch an IO field on the HMI touch screen, the alphanumerical screen keyboard
appears. The keyboard is automatically hidden again when input is complete.
Figure 8-2 Alphanumerical screen keyboard, normal level
Keyboard levels
The alphanumerical keyboard is organized in several levels:
Normal level
Shift level
Operating a project
8.5 Entries and help within a project
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
8-10 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Procedure
You can enter alphanumerical values character-by-character using the alphanumerical
screen keyboard.
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the relevant IO field on the screen.
The alphanumerical screen keyboard opens and displays the current value.
2. Set the value.
The following options for entering values are available:
The current value is deleted when you enter the first character. Enter the value again.
Use the and keys to move the cursor within the current value. You can now
edit the characters of the current value or add characters.
Use the key to delete the character to the left of the cursor.
You can quickly switch between screen keyboard level using he key. When you
toggle the level, the key labels on the screen keyboard change.
Select to view the infotext of the IO field.
This key is only enabled if infotext or the current screen has been configured for the
input object.
3. Select to confirm your entries or cancel them with . Both actions close the
screen keyboard.
Note
Opened screen keyboard
When the on-screen keyboard is open, PLC job 51, "Select Screen" has no function.
Language switching
Switching the language in the project has no effect on the alphanumerical screen
keyboard. This is why Cyrillic characters cannot be input at this time.
Result
You have changed the alphanumerical value or entered a new one.
Operating a project
8.5 Entries and help within a project
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 8-11
8.5.4 Entering and editing symbolic values
Selection list
When you touch a symbolic IO field on the HMI touch screen, a selection list appears.
Figure 8-3 Symbolic IO field after touch, example
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the required IO field.
The selection list of the symbolic IO field is displayed. You can scroll through the
selection list with the and buttons.
2. Select an entry in the selection list.
Touch an entry to select it. This is then taken by the controller.
Result
You have changed the symbolic value or entered a new one.
8.5.5 Entering the date and time
Entering the date and time
Enter the date and time in the same way you enter alphanumerical values.
Note
When entering the date and time, please note that the format is determined by the
configured project language.
See also
Setting the project language (Page 8-5)
Entering and editing alphanumerical values (Page 8-9)
Operating a project
8.5 Entries and help within a project
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
8-12 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
8.5.6 Operating switches
Introduction
The switches described in the following have two circuit states. Each circuit state is assigned
a fixed value. When you operate the switch, it changes to the opposite circuit state and
thereby activates the configured value.
Switches can contain sliders, texts or graphics for a specific project.
Procedure - Switch with Slider
Proceed as follows:
Move the slider on the touch screen of the HMI device to the other position or double-click
the slider area.
Figure 8-4 Switch
Slider
Result
The slider is now in the other position. The assigned value is activated.
Procedure - Slider with Text or Graphic
Proceed as follows:
Touch the switch on the touch screen of the HMI device.
Figure 8-5 Switch with graphic – example
Result
The switch changes its appearance. The assigned value is switched.
Operating a project
8.5 Entries and help within a project
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 8-13
8.5.7 Operating sliding controllers
Introduction
With the slider control you can change and monitor process values within a defined range.
The slider control can also be configured without a slider. No value is entered in this case.
The slider control servers only to display values.
Figure 8-6 Slider control – example
Slider control for entering values
Value display with current value
Appearance
You can configure the appearance and the elements of the slider control. The slider control
can contain a label and a setting range, for example. The current value can be configured to
appear below the area of the slider control.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the slider.
2. Move the slider to the required value.
If a value display has been configured, you can check the exact value that has been set.
3. Release the slider.
The set value is applied.
Result
The assigned value has been changed.
Operating a project
8.5 Entries and help within a project
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
8-14 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
8.5.8 Displaying infotext
Purpose
The configuration engineer uses infotext to provide additional information and operating
instructions with respect to screens and operable screen objects.
Infotext can provide information on the value to be entered in an IO field, for example.
Figure 8-7 Infotext for an IO field, example
Infotext for Input Objects
Touch the key on the screen keyboard. This key is only enabled if infotext or the current
screen has been configured for the input object.
Note
Switching between Displayed Infotexts
If infotext has been configured for an IO field and a screen, touching the infotext window
toggles between the two.
Infotext for Other Operator Controls
Infotext can also be configured for operator controls, such as buttons. The infotext of the
selected operator control can be displayed by pressing a configured soft key.
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.
Infotext for the Current Screen
Infotext can also be configured for screens. The infotext for the current screen is called up or
by the screen keyboard or by an operator control object assigned to this function .
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.
Closing the Infotext
Close the infotext with .
Operating a project
8.6 Status / control
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 8-15
8.6 8.6 Status / control
Application
You read or write access values of the connected controller directly in the status force view.
The status force view allows you to carry out operations such as monitoring or modifying the
addresses of the controller program, without the need of an online connection via PC or PG.
Note
The status force view can only be used in combination with SIMATIC S5 or SIMATIC S7
controllers.
Appearance
The figure shows the general layout of the status force display. A value can be monitored
and controlled on every line.
Figure 8-8 Status force display – example
The configuration engineer specifies which columns appear in the status force display. The
table shows the significance of the potential columns.
Column Function
"Connection" The PLC of which the address ranges are to be displayed
"Type", "DB Number", "Offset",
"Bit"
The address range of the value.
"Data Type", "Format" The data type of the value.
"Status Value" The value read from the specified address.
"Control Value" The value to be written to the specified address.
Change the Column Sequence
You change the column arrangement if this has been configured. To reverse the "Format"
and "Control Value" columns, for example, touch the "Format" header on the touch screen of
the HMI device. Keep the touch screen pressed and drag the column heading to the "Control
Value" heading.
Operating a project
8.6 Status / control
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
8-16 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Operator Controls
The buttons have the following functions when configured:
Button Function
"Read" button
Updates the display in the "Status Value" column.
The button engages when it is pressed. You cannot operate any input fields until
the button is actuated again and the refresh is stopped.
"Write" button
Applies the new value in the "Control Value" column. The control value is then
written to the controller.
Procedure - Reading the Status Value
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the address and the desired format of a value for each line. Touch the respective
column to display the screen keyboard.
2. Once you have entered all of the desired values, touch the button.
Result
All values are read cyclically by the controller and entered in the "Status Value" column until
the button is touched again.
Requirements for Forcing
The following requirements must be fulfilled in order to force values:
The "Control Value" column must be available.
The "Write" column must be available.
Procedure - Forcing a Value
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the address of a value for each line. Enter the desired value in the "Control Value"
column. Touch the respective column to display the screen keyboard.
2. Once you have entered all of the desired values, touch the button.
Result
The values from the "Control Value" column are transferred once to the controller.
Operating a project
8.7 Pointer instrument
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 8-17
8.7 8.7 Pointer instrument
Introduction
The gauge displays analog numerical values using a pointer. The operator at the HMI device
can thus see at a glance, for example, that the boiler pressure is in the normal range.
Appearance
The appearance of the gauge depends on the configuration.
A trailing pointer can display the maximum value reached so far on the scale. The trailing
pointer is reset when the screen is reloaded.
The label on the scale can show the measured variable, e.g. boiler pressure, and the
physical unit, e.g. bar.
Operation
The gauge is for display only and cannot be controlled by the operator.
Operating a project
8.8 Sm@rtClient view
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
8-18 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
8.8 8.8 Sm@rtClient view
Overview
The Sm@rtClient view at PN HMI devices can be used to monitor and operate the current
project on a different HMI device remotely. In case of a corresponding configuration it is also
possible for several equal HMI devices to access a remote HMI device.
Procedure - starting remote control
Proceed as follows:
1. Change on the HMI device to the screen with the Sm@rtClient view.
The following options are available for establishing the connection to the remote HMI
device:
The connection is established automatically.
The connection has to be established by touching the corresponding command
button.
It may be necessary to enter the address of the remote HMI device and a password.
2. The current screen of the project running on the remote device is displayed on the screen
of your HMI device.
3. You can now monitor and control this screens according to your configuration.
Scroll bars are displayed if the screen of the remote HMI device is larger than that of the
current HMI device.
Monitoring mode
On a Sm@rtClient view which is configured for monitoring mode, you can only monitor the
remote HMI device. You cannot control its operation.
Operating the softkeys
The following options are available for operating the softkeys:
A function is configured locally at the softkey:
The softkey acts locally on your HMI device.
No function is configured locally to the softkey:
The softkey acts on the remote HMI device.
Operating a project
8.8 Sm@rtClient view
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 8-19
Procedure - Forcing the operating permission
If several HMI devices access an HMI device, only one HMI device has permission to
operate.
Two cases must be distinguished for this case:
If another HMI device is already controlling the remote HMI device, you can, in an
emergency and if configured, force permission to operate the remote HMI device.
You are trying to operate the remote HMI device.
A dialog box is displayed in which you have to enter the corresponding password for
forcing the remote control permission.
You can now operate the remote HMI device.
If another HMI device accesses your HMI device via the Sm@rtClient view, you can force
the local operating permission for your HMI device.
Touch the screen of your HMI device five times consecutively.
You are given permission to operate your local HMI device.
Procedure - terminating remote control
You can terminate the remote monitoring or the remote control by one of the following steps,
depending on the configuration:
Touch the command button configured to this purpose.
Exit the screen that contains the Sm@rtClient view.
If configured, a menu is displayed after you have touched an empty space over a longer
period. Touch the menu item "((DoNotTranslate[Close]DNT))".
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.
Note
If another HMI device accesses your HMI device via the Sm@rtClient view, this leads to an
additional load on your HMI device.
Operating a project
8.9 Operating trends
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
8-20 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
8.9 8.9 Operating trends
8.9.1 Overview
Trends
Trends continuously display the current process data.
Trend View
Trends are displayed in the Trend view. A Trend view can display several trends
simultaneously.
Figure 8-9 Trend view - example
Ruler
Trend value in the value table
The appearance, axes, value range and labels of the Trend view can be set by the
configuration engineer.
The configuration engineer can set limits for the trend values. A color transition can be
configured when the limits are exceeded.
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.
Value Table
The trend values can be read from the value table, if this is configured.
Ruler
The exact trend values can be read from the ruler, if this is configured.
Operating a project
8.9 Operating trends
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 8-21
8.9.2 Operating the trend display
Value Table
The trend values are displayed in the value table. When the ruler is displayed, the trend
values are shown at a position of the ruler. When the ruler is hidden, the latest trend values
are displayed.
Ruler
When configured, a ruler is available to provide an exact reading of the individual values.
The position of the ruler can be changed by touching and dragging it on the touch screen.
The configuration engineer can configure the following actions for operator controls outside
the Trend display:
Display or hide ruler
Move ruler forward
Move ruler backward
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.
Other Operator Actions
The configuration engineer can configure the following actions for operator controls outside
the Trend display:
Enlarge display of time intervals
Reduce display of time intervals
Scroll back by one display width
Scroll forward by one display width
Stop or resume trend recording
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.
Operating a project
8.10 Project security
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
8-22 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
8.10 8.10 Project security
8.10.1 Overview
Overview
The configuration engineer can protect the operation of a project by implementing a security
system.
The security system of the HMI device is based on permissions, user groups and users.
If operator control objects protected by a password are operated, the HMI device requests
the entry of a password. A logon screen is displayed in which you enter your user name and
password. After logging in, you can operate the operator control objects for which you have
the necessary permissions.
The logon dialog can be set up by the configuration engineer via an individual operator
control object.
In the same way, the configuration engineer can set up an operator control object to log off.
After logging off, objects assigned password protection can no longer be operated; to do so,
log in again.
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.
User Groups and Permissions
Project-specific user groups are created by the configuration engineer. The "Administrators"
group is included in all projects by default. User groups are assigned permissions.
Permission required for an operation is specifically defined for each individual object and
function in the project.
Users
Each user is assigned to exactly one user group.
Users can be created as follows:
By the configuration engineer during configuration
By the administrator on the HMI device
By a user with user management permission on the HMI device
Logoff Times
A logoff time is specified in the system for each user. If the time between any two user
actions, e.g, entering a value or changing screens, exceeds this logoff time, the user is
automatically logged off. The user must then log in again to continue to operate objects
assigned password protection.
Operating a project
8.10 Project security
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 8-23
Passwords
If an administrator or a user with administrator permission is logged on, all users on the HMI
device are displayed in the User view.
If no administrator or user with administrator permission is logged on, only the personal user
entry is displayed.
The permissions of a user after logging in depends on the user group to the user is
assigned. Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.
The user data is encrypted and saved on the HMI device to protect it from loss due to power
failure.
Note
Depending on the transfer settings, changes to the user data are overwritten when the
project is transferred again.
User View
Use the User view to display the users on the HMI device.
All users on the HMI device system are displayed in the User view to the administrator or to
a user with administrator permissions. When user management permission is lacking, only
the personal user entry is displayed.
The configuration engineer can implement simple or advanced User view in the project. The
two user views offer the same functions and differ only in the display of information.
Simple User View
The simple user view only displays the user name and user group.
Advanced User View
The advanced user view displays more information about the users.
Operating a project
8.10 Project security
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
8-24 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Backup and Restore
The users, passwords, group assignments and logoff times can be backed up and restored
on the HMI device. This prevents you having to enter all of the data again on another HMI
device.
Notice
During a restore, the currently valid user data is overwritten. The restored user data and
passwords are valid immediately.
Limits for User, Password and User View
Number of characters
Length of user name, maximum 40
Length of password, minimum 3
Length of password, maximum 24
Entry in user view, maximum 50
8.10.2 User login
Requirements
Use the logon dialog to log into the security system of the HMI device. Enter user name and
password in the logon dialog.
Figure 8-10 Logon dialog
You have the following options for displaying the logon dialog:
Touch the operator control object with password protection.
Touch an operator control object that was configured for displaying the logon dialog.
Double-click on the "<ENTER>" entry in the simple User view.
At the beginning of the project, the logon dialog will be automatically displayed in certain
circumstances.
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.
Operating a project
8.10 Project security
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 8-25
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Enter the user name and password.
Touch the corresponding input field. The alphanumerical screen keyboard is displayed.
2. Touch the "OK" button.
Note
The user name is not case-sensitive.
The password is case-sensitive.
Result
After successful logon to the security system, you can execute password-protected functions
on the HMI device for which you have permissions.
If you enter a wrong password, an error message is displayed when an Alarm window has
been configured.
8.10.3 User logoff
Requirements
You have logged into the security system of the HMI device.
Procedure
You have the following options for logging off:
The user is logged off automatically if no operations are carried out and if the logoff time
has been exceeded
By touching the operating object that was configured for logging off
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.
If an incorrect password is entered, the logged-on user is also logged off.
Result
The user is no longer logged into the project. In order to operate an operator control object
with password protection, you must first log in again.
Operating a project
8.10 Project security
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
8-26 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
8.10.4 Creating a user
Requirements
New users are created in the user view.
To display the user view, switch to the screen that contains the user view.
To create a new user, you must have user management permission.
Procedure - Creating a User in the Simple User View
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the "<New User>" entry in the user view.
The following dialog appears:
2. Enter the desired user information.
Touch the corresponding input field. The alphanumerical screen keyboard is displayed.
The password may not contain space characters or the special characters * ? . % / \ ' ".
3. Touch the "OK" button.
The following dialog appears:
4. Enter the desired user information.
Touch the corresponding input field. The appropriate screen keyboard is displayed.
For the logoff time, you can use values of 0 to 60 minutes. The value 0 stands for "no
automatic logoff."
5. Touch the "OK" button.
Result
The new user is created.
Operating a project
8.10 Project security
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 8-27
Procedure - Creating a User in the Advanced User View
Proceed as follows:
Enter the required user information on the empty lines of the User view.
Touch the corresponding input field. The appropriate screen keyboard is displayed.
The password may not contain space characters or the special characters * ? . % / \ ' ".
For the logoff time, you can use values of 0 to 60 minutes. The value 0 stands for "no
automatic logoff."
Result
The new user is created.
8.10.5 Changing user data
Requirements
Change user data in the user view.
To display the user view, switch to the screen that contains the user view.
The following options are available for the range of changes that can be made:
The administrator or a user with user management permission can change the data for all
users on the HMI device system in the user view.
User name
Group assignment
Password
Logoff time
Users without user management permission can only change their own user data.
Password
Logoff time, if configured
Note
You can only change the logoff time and password for the "Admin" user.
You can only change the logoff time for the "PLC_User". This user entry is used for
logging in via the PLC.
Operating a project
8.10 Project security
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
8-28 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Procedure - Changing User Data in the Simple User View
This procedure describes changing user data by the administrator or a user with user
management permission.
Proceed as follows:
1. In the user view, touch the user whose user data you want to change.
The following dialog appears:
2. Change the desired user data.
Touch the corresponding input field. The appropriate screen keyboard is displayed.
3. Touch the "OK" button.
The following dialog appears:
4. Change the desired user data.
Touch the corresponding input field. The appropriate screen keyboard is displayed.
5. Touch the "OK" button.
Result
The user data for the user is changed.
Operating a project
8.10 Project security
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 8-29
Procedure - Changing User Data in the Advanced User View
This procedure describes changing user data by the administrator or a user with user
management permission.
Proceed as follows:
1. In the user view, touch the user whose user data you want to change.
The appropriate screen keyboard is displayed.
2. Change the desired user data.
Result
The user data for the user is changed.
8.10.6 Deleting a user
Requirements
You delete users in the user view:
To display the user view, switch to the screen that contains the user view.
To delete a user, you must have user management permission.
Note
The "Admin" and "PLC_User" users exist by default and cannot be deleted.
Operating a project
8.10 Project security
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
8-30 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Procedure - Deleting a User in the Simple User View
1. Touch the user that you want to delete in the User view.
The following dialog appears:
2. Touch the "User" input field.
The alphanumerical screen keyboard is displayed.
3. Touch the button on the screen keyboard.
The existing user name is deleted from the screen keyboard.
4. Touch the button on the screen keyboard.
The user name in the "User" input field is deleted.
The following dialog appears:
5. Touch the "OK" button.
Result
The user is deleted. The User view appears again.
Procedure - Deleting a User in the Advanced User View
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the user you want to delete in the "User" input field of the User view.
The alphanumerical screen keyboard is displayed.
2. Touch the button on the screen keyboard.
The existing user name is deleted from the screen keyboard.
3. Touch the button on the screen keyboard.
The user name in the "User" input field is deleted.
Result
The user is deleted.
Operating a project
8.11 Closing the project
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 8-31
8.11 8.11 Closing the project
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Use the corresponding operator control object to close the project.
Wait for the Loader to open after you closed the project.
2. Switch off power to the HMI device.
Note
Recovery time
Wait for approx. one second after you have removed the connecting cable from the
terminal box before you plug the connecting cable back into the terminal box.
Operating a project
8.11 Closing the project
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
8-32 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 9-1
Operating alarms 9
9.1 9.1 Overview
Alarms
Alarms indicate events and states on the HMI device which have occurred in the system, in
the process or on the HMI device itself. A status is reported when it is received.
An alarm could trigger one of the following alarm events:
Incoming
Outgoing
Acknowledge
The configuration engineer defines which alarms must be acknowledged by the user.
An alarm may contain the following information:
Date
Time
Alarm text
Error location
State
Alarm class
Alarm number
Acknowledgement group
Diagnostics capability
Operating alarms
9.2 Displaying alarms
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
9-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Alarm Classes
Alarms are assigned to various alarm classes:
Error
Alarms in this class must always be acknowledged. Alarms normally indicate critical
errors within the plant such as "Motor temperature too high".
Warning
Warning alarms usually indicate states of a plant such as "Motor switched on".
System
System alarms indicate states or events which occur on the HMI device.
SIMATIC diagnostic alarms
SIMATIC diagnostic alarms show states and events of the SIMATIC S7 or SIMOTION
controllers.
User-specific alarm classes
The properties of this alarm class must be defined in the configuration.
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.
Alarm Buffer
Alarm events are saved to an internal buffer. The size of this alarm buffer depends on the
HMI device type.
9.2 9.2 Displaying alarms
Alarm View
Alarms are indicated in the Alarm view or in the Alarm window on the HMI device.
The Alarm view can be implemented with the following components:
Alarm numbers and alarm texts are displayed as single lines.
As simple Alarm view
As advanced Alarm view
In the simple or advanced Alarm views the configuration engineer specifies the alarm
information to be displayed.
Alarm Window
The layout and operation of the Alarm window correspond to that of the Alarm view.
The Alarm window is independent of the process screen. Depending on the configuration,
the Alarm window appears automatically as soon as a new, unacknowledged alarm has
been received. The Alarm window can be configured so that it only closes after all the alarms
have been acknowledged.
Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.
Operating alarms
9.2 Displaying alarms
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 9-3
Simple Alarm View
The buttons have the following functions:
Button Function
Displays an alarm operator note
Edit alarm
Acknowledge alarm
Select the next or previous alarm from the list
To scroll one page up or down
Advanced Alarm View
The buttons have the following functions:
Button Function
Displays an alarm operator note
Edit alarm
Acknowledge alarm
Changing the Column Sequence and Sorting in the Advanced Alarm View
You can change the column sequence and sorting to suit the project.
Change column sequence
To reverse the "Time" and "Date" columns, for example, touch the "Date" header on the
HMI device touch screen. Continue to press the touch screen and drag the column
heading to the "Time" heading.
Operating alarms
9.2 Displaying alarms
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
9-4 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Change sorting order
To change the sorting of the alarms, touch the respective column heading on the touch
screen of the HMI device.
Representation of Alarm Classes
The various alarm classes are identified in order to distinguish between them in the Alarm
view.
Symbol Alarm class
! Error
(empty) Warning
(depends on the configuration) User-defined alarm classes
S7 SIMATIC or SIMOTION Diagnostic Alarms
$ System
The configuration engineer can edit the alarm class symbols. Further information on this may
be available in your plant documentation.
Viewing Infotext
The configuration engineer can also supply infotext for alarms.
To view an alarm infotext:
1. Select the required alarm in the Alarm view
2. Touch the button in the simple Alarm view or in the advanced Alarm
view.
The infotext assigned to this alarm is displayed.
3. Close the infotext window with
Alarm Indicator
The alarm indicator is a graphical symbol that shows current errors or errors which need to
be acknowledged, depending on the configuration.
Figure 9-1 Alarm indicator with three queued alarms
The alarm indicator flashes as long as alarms are queued for acknowledgment. The number
indicates the number of queued alarms. The configuration engineer can assign functions to
be executed when the alarm indicator is touched.
Usually, the alarm indicator is only used for error alarms. Further information may be
available in your plant documentation.
Operating alarms
9.3 Acknowledge alarm
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 9-5
9.3 9.3 Acknowledge alarm
Requirements
The alarm which is to be acknowledged is displayed in the Alarm window or in the Alarm
view.
Either the Alarm window or the Alarm view is enabled.
The alarm must be acknowledged.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the alarm by touching it in the Alarm view or Alarm window.
2. Touch the button in the simple Alarm view or in the advanced Alarm
view.
A soft key can also be configured to acknowledge alarms.
Result
The alarm or all alarms of the corresponding acknowledgement group are acknowledged.
Further information about acknowledgment may be available in your plant documentation.
See also
Displaying alarms (Page 9-2)
Operating alarms
9.4 Edit alarm
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
9-6 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
9.4 9.4 Edit alarm
Introduction
The configuration engineer can assign additional functions to each alarm. These functions
are executed when the alarm is processed.
Requirements
The alarm to be edited is indicated in the Alarm window or in the Alarm view.
Either the Alarm window or the Alarm view is enabled.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the alarm by touching it in the Alarm view or Alarm window.
2. Touch the button in the simple Alarm view or in the advanced Alarm
view.
Result
The system executes the additional functions of the alarm. Further information on this may
be available in your plant documentation.
Note
When you edit an unacknowledged alarm, it is acknowledged automatically.
See also
Displaying alarms (Page 9-2)
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 10-1
Operating recipes 10
10.1 10.1 Purpose of and applications for recipes
Introduction
A product is often manufactured in different variants. These variants can be based on
varying numbers and types of product components The variation of the product components
can be saved in a recipe.
Application Areas
A recipe can be used everywhere the same product components can be used in variable
combinations to create different product variants.
The following are examples:
Beverage industry
Food processing industry
Pharmaceutical industry
Paint industry
Building materials industry
Steel industry
Operating recipes
10.2 Structure of a recipe
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
10-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
10.2 10.2 Structure of a recipe
What is a recipe?
A recipe is a configurable object in WinCC flexible and consists of at least one recipe record.
It can be compared to a drawer in a file cabinet.
Figure 10-1 Graphical representation of recipes
Example
File cabinet Recipe collection Recipes for a fruit juice plant
Drawer Recipe Beverage variants made of grapefruit juice
Drawer Recipe Beverage variants made of apple juice
Hanging folder Recipe record Juice made from apples
Drawer Recipe Beverage variants made of orange juice
The hanging folders in the drawers represent records required for manufacturing various
product variants, such as beverage variants. What is special about a recipe is that the
records can involve the same product components. The records of a recipe, therefore, only
differ in the quantities combining the same product components.
Product variants of a recipe for a fruit juice plant might be a soft drink, a juice and a nectar,
for example. The product components are the same but at least the proportion of fruit juice
differs.
By exchanging the fruit juice as the product component, additional recipes can be created for
similar products. For example, in a fruit juice plant this might involve:
A soft drink, juice and nectar made of grapefruit juice
A soft drink, juice and nectar made of apple juice
A soft drink, juice and nectar made of orange juice
A soft drink, juice and nectar made of pineapple juice
Operating recipes
10.2 Structure of a recipe
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 10-3
The recipe is therefore built by the collection of all records belonging to the recipe, the recipe
records. The following graphic shows this from a configurational point of view.
Figure 10-2 Structure of a recipe
List of records in a recipe
List of the recipe elements.
The recipe elements are shown in the Recipe view. These are displayed as names in the
Recipe view.
List of the recipe numbers.
The recipe numbers are shown in the Recipe view.
Structure of a Recipe Record
Using the analogy of a file cabinet once again, a recipe record corresponds to a hanging
folder. Each page in the hanging folder can be compared to a variable in the recipe record.
Figure 10-3 Graphical representation of recipe records
Example
Drawer Recipe For beverage variants made of apple juice
Hanging folder Recipe record Juice made from apples
Hanging folder Recipe record Juice made from oranges
Hanging folder Recipe record Juice made from red currents
Hanging folder Recipe record Juice made from grapes
A recipe record consists of a set number of elements. A value is save in each element.
The number of elements is the same for all recipe records in a recipe.
Operating recipes
10.3 Display recipes
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
10-4 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
The following graphic shows the relationship between elements and values from a
configurational point of view.
Figure 10-4 Structure of a recipe record
Elements belonging to a recipe record.
These are displayed as names in the Recipe view.
Values for the nectar recipe record
The "Display name" and "Number" are used in the Recipe view and in the Recipe screen as
explained below.
10.3 10.3 Display recipes
Introduction
In order to display recipes and the accompanying recipe records on the HMI device,
appropriate operator controls need to be configured. This is a component of the project and
consists of one of the following two objects:
Recipe view
The Recipe view can take the form of a simple or an advanced view.
Recipe screen
The Recipe view itself is a component of a Recipe screen. Depending on the
requirements, not all IO fields and buttons need to be configured. Several Recipe views
can be used in multiple Recipe screens.
Operating recipes
10.3 Display recipes
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 10-5
Advanced Recipe View
A Recipe view is a screen object used to manage recipe records. The Recipe view is
configured according to the requirements for the input and output and contains
corresponding fields and buttons.
Figure 10-5 Example of an advanced Recipe view
Selection field for the recipe
Selection field for the recipe record
Element name
The element name represents a specific element in the recipe record.
Display field
This show the number of the selected recipe or the selected recipe record.
Value of the element
Buttons for editing a recipe record
Status bar display the status messages
The recipe view shows recipe records in tabular form. The Recipe view is especially useful
when there are only a few elements in the recipe record or only a few values that need to be
changed.
Operating recipes
10.3 Display recipes
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
10-6 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Simple Recipe View
The simple view (simple Recipe view) is used to display and edit recipes on HMI devices
which have a display smaller than 6".
The simple recipe view consists of three areas:
Recipe selection
Recipe record selection
Recipe entries
In the simple recipe view, each area is shown separately on the HMI device. The simple
recipe view always begins with the recipe selection.
The following graphic show the selection of a recipe record.
%HYHUDJH
1HFWDU
-XLFH
Figure 10-6 Example of an simple Recipe view – selection of a recipe record
Number of selected recipe records
Recipe records
Button for calling up recipe entries
Operating recipes
10.4 Operating recipe handling
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 10-7
Recipe Screen
A Recipe screen is a process screen which you configure by combining I/O fields and screen
objects to form a custom input screen. This enables you to input parameters in the context of
a machine visualization. The IO fields of a recipe can be distributed over several Recipe
screens. This allows recipe elements to be arranged by subject. The required operator
control functions in the Recipe screen can be called using buttons. A modified Recipe view
can itself be a component of a Recipe screen.
:DWHU
&RQFHQWUDWH
6XJDU
$URPD
5HFLSHQDPH
'DWDUHFRUGQDPH
1R
1R
6DYH
/RDG
'DWDIURP3/&
'DWDWR3/&
2UDQJH
1HFWDU




O
O
NJ
O
Figure 10-7 Example of a Recipe screen
Element names and corresponding values
The element name represents a specific element in the recipe record.
Buttons for editing a recipe record
Modified Recipe view
Buttons for transferring recipe data
10.4 10.4 Operating recipe handling
10.4.1 Operating the recipe view
Introduction
As a component of a project the recipe structure cannot be changed on the HMI device. The
values in the recipe structure that can be stored as recipe data records can be changed. This
means that it is possible to adapt the product variants that are to be manufactured to the
specific production conditions. In addition, the obtained recipe data records can be
transferred to other HMI devices. For this purpose operator control elements are contained in
the recipe view or in the recipe screen These are explained below.
Operating recipes
10.4 Operating recipe handling
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
10-8 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Operating the recipe view
The presence of the following symbols and the functions connected therewith depends on
the project.
Function Action on pressing
Create recipe data records
A new recipe data record is created.
If a starting count has been configured, it is displayed in the input
box.
Save recipe data records
The displayed values are saved.
The storage location is specified by the project.
Delete a recipe data record
The displayed recipe data record is deleted.
Transfer recipe data record
from the PLC
The values of the recipe data records are transferred from the PLC
into the recipe that is set at the HMI device.
Transfer recipe data record to
the PLC
The values of the set recipe data record are transferred from the HMI
device to the PLC.
Synchronize tags
The values of the recipe view are synchronized with the
corresponding tags. In the process the values that changed during
processing are written into the corresponding tags. Subsequently all
the values of the tags are read out and updated in the table.
The button is only active in the case of recipes with synchronized
tags.
Save recipe data records as
Irrespective of the recipe view a recipe data record can be saved
under a different name on the data medium. A dialog box is opened
in which the name is entered.
The procedure for operating these functions is explained below, whereby the displayed
symbols are used. Correspondingly configured command buttons apply for a recipe view.
Operating the recipe view
Screen-specific command buttons that correspond functionally to the icons of the recipe view
are available for operation in the recipe view.
Entering the value.
If you want to change the value of a tag, call up the screen keyboard.
The functions listed in the table and the entry of values can also have been configured to a
softkey. Further information on this may be available in your plant documentation.
Displaying a value
Notice
Changing the recipe data record in the background
Applies for the processing of a recipe data record:
If values of the corresponding recipe data record are changed by a control job, the recipe
view is not updated automatically.
Operating recipes
10.4 Operating recipe handling
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 10-9
10.4.2 Operator input in the overview
Overview
The following figure shows the possible data flows with an HMI device and externally.
5HFLSH
5HFLSH
5HFLSH
5HFLSHQ
LQWHUQDOGDWD
PHPRU\
5HFLSH
DGPLQLVWUDWLRQ
7DJV
+0,GHYLFH
3/&GHYLFH
0XOWL0HGLD&DUG
Figure 10-8 Schematic drawing of the data flow
Delete, save or save recipe record as
Load recipe record
Synchronize / do not synchronize tags
Tags are online for controller
Recipe record transfer – writing to the controller
Recipe record transfer – reading from the controller
Recipe record transfer – data communication between the data store of the HMI device and
the controller
Backup/restore – exporting recipe records
Backup/restore – importing recipe records
"Recipe record transfer" data transfer between HMI device and controller is according
represented by the graphic.
Operating recipes
10.4 Operating recipe handling
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
10-10 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
10.4.3 Creating recipe records
Introduction
There are several ways to create a recipe record on the HMI device:
Using the Recipe view
Using the Recipe function
Using PLC jobs
This involves saving a recipe record in the controller, opening and modifying it. It can then
be saved as a new recipe record.
Requirements
The "Create data record" and "Save data record" functions have been configured.
The recipe for which a new recipe record should be created has been selected on the
HMI device.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch .
A new recipe record with the next available number is created.
If you change the new recipe record number to an existing recipe record number, the
recipe record is overwritten.
2. Enter the name for the recipe record.
3. Enter values for the recipe record.
The tags of the recipe record can be assigned default values depending on the project.
4. Touch .
The recipe record is deleted. If the recipe record already exists, a system alarm will be
output to the screen.
Result
The new recipe records will be saved to the selected recipe.
Using the "Export data record" function you can transfer new recipe records to an external
storage medium.
See also
Operator input in the overview (Page 10-9)
Operating recipes
10.4 Operating recipe handling
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 10-11
10.4.4 Editing a recipe data record
Introduction
Recipes can be edited as follows:
Offline
You can only edit values offline in the Recipe view.
Online
Values editing in the Recipe screen are immediately transferred to the controller.
The configuration of the recipe screen determines whether the recipe data are edited offline
or online.
When working in the Recipe view and offline in the Recipe screen, you have to transfer an
edited recipe record using the function "Transfer to PLC".
Requirements
The "Save data record" function has been configured.
A recipe containing the recipe record to be changed has been selected on the HMI
device.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the recipe record to be edited.
2. Change the entries and values as required.
3. Touch .
The recipe record is deleted. If you wish to save the recipe record under another name,
press .
Result
The edited recipe record has now been saved in the selected recipe. The values are now in
effect if you are working in the online mode of the Recipe view.
See also
Operator input in the overview (Page 10-9)
Operating recipes
10.4 Operating recipe handling
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
10-12 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
10.4.5 Delete recipe data record
Introduction
The number of recipe records in a recipe can be changed. Unneeded recipe records can be
deleted. If necessary, even all the recipe records can be deleted.
Requirements
The "Delete data record" function has been configured.
A recipe containing the recipe record to be deleted has been selected on the HMI device.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select a recipe record for deletion based on the data record name.
2. Touch .
The recipe record is deleted.
Result
The recipe record has now been deleted on the HMI device.
See also
Operator input in the overview (Page 10-9)
Operating recipes
10.4 Operating recipe handling
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 10-13
10.4.6 Export recipe data record
Introduction
The ability to export a recipe record to a CSV file depends on the project. The values in the
recipe record can be manipulated in a spreadsheet program such as MS Excel. The degree
to which you can influence the export depends on the project: Various input fields may be
configured on the user interface of a project:
File path of the CSV file
Selection field for the recipe record to be exported
Overwrite CSV file
Requirements
The "Export data record" function has been configured.
A recipe containing the recipe record to be exported has been selected on the HMI
device.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select a recipe record for export based on the data record name.
2. Touch the "Export data record" button.
The data record is exported to a CSV file on an external data medium.
Result
The recipe record is exported.
See also
Operator input in the overview (Page 10-9)
10.4.7 Import recipe records
Introduction
An import involves importing values from a CSV file into a data record.
Requirements
The "Import data record" function has been configured.
A recipe containing the recipe record to be imported has been selected on the HMI
device.
Operating recipes
10.4 Operating recipe handling
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
10-14 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Touch the "Import data record" button.
The data record is imported from an external data medium as a CSV file and then
displayed in the Recipe view.
Result
The imported recipe record is saved on the HMI device.
If the structure of the CSV file differs from the structure of the recipe, deviations are handled
as follows:
Any additional values in the CSV file will be rejected.
The system applies the configured default value to the recipe record if the CSV file
contains an insufficient number of values.
If the CSV file contains values of the wrong data type, the configured default value is set
in the recipe record.
Example:
The CSV file contains values that were entered as floating point numbers.
However, the corresponding tag expects an integer value. In this case, the system
discards the imported value and uses the configured default.
See also
Operator input in the overview (Page 10-9)
10.4.8 Synchronizing tags
Introduction
Differences may occur between the display values in the Recipe view and the actual values
of tags in an ongoing project when input is made in the Recipe view or when tags are
changed. To avoid such differences, the "Synchronize data record" function can be
configured.
Depending on the project, the values displayed in the Recipe view can be synchronized as
follows:
With the values of the tags
With the values of the controller
This synchronization is performed for each one of the tags contained in the recipe record.
Requirements
The "Synchronize data record" function has been configured.
A recipe containing the recipe record to be synchronized has been selected on the HMI
device.
Operating recipes
10.5 Using recipes
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 10-15
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select the recipe record to be synchronized.
2. Touch .
The elements of the recipe record are synchronized with the values of the controller. It is
synchronized as follows:
When the value of a tag has more recent value than the Recipe view, the most recent
value is applied to the Recipe view.
When the displayed value in the recipe view is more recent than the tag value, the
most recent value is applied to the tag.
Notice
Changed Tag Names
Synchronization cannot be performed if the tag names in the data records to be
synchronized do not match. The tags in question are not synchronized.
Result
After synchronization, both the tags in the controller and the tags in the Recipe view contain
the most recently updated values. The values in the Recipe view and the values in the tags
are now identical.
See also
Operator input in the overview (Page 10-9)
10.5 10.5 Using recipes
10.5.1 Configuring the transfer of recipe data records
Introduction
The transfer of recipe records needs to be configured to suit the application. To write a value
to a recipe record on your HMI device without disturbing the current process in the plant, you
need configuration settings other than those required for assigning parameters to a machine.
Operating recipes
10.5 Using recipes
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
10-16 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Principle
The settings in the recipe determine if the data records are to synchronized and immediately
transferred to the controller. The following figure is a schematic representation of this
possibility. The settings cannot be made on the HMI device.
5HFLSHPDQDJHPHQW
7DJV
<HVQR
2QOLQH2IIOLQH
6\QFKURQL]HWDJV
5HFLSHUHFRUG
Figure 10-9 Recipe settings
The following three configurations can be made with the settings:
Recipe without "Synchronize tags"
Recipe with "Synchronize tags" and with "Tags offline"
Recipe with "Synchronize tags" and with "Tags online"
Recipe without "Synchronize tags"
The data of a recipe record are only displayed in the Recipe view or Recipe screen and can
only be edited there. If you use the same tags outside the Recipe view or Recipe screen, this
has no effect on the values in the Recipe view or Recipe screen
Recipe with "Synchronize tags" and with "Tags offline"
The "Synchronize tags" setting specifies if the values in a recipe record that have been read
from the controller or a data store, is written to the tags in a recipe record on the HMI device.
The data transfer can also be performed in the opposite direction, from the HMI device to the
controller or to external data store.
The "offline" setting causes the entered values to be saved but not automatically transferred
to the controller or HMI device.
Recipe with "Synchronize tags" and with "Tags online"
The "Synchronize tags" setting specifies if the values in a recipe record that have been read
from the controller or memory, is written to the tags in a recipe record on the HMI device.
The data transfer can also be performed in the opposite direction, from the HMI device to the
controller or to external data store.
The input or read data are transferred immediately to the controller:
Operating recipes
10.5 Using recipes
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 10-17
10.5.2 Reading a recipe data record from the PLC
Introduction
You can read values from the PLC and write them to a recipe data record. For example, you
can do this in machine teach-in mode in order to save the positioning data of axes as a
recipe record.
The read values are written to the recipe record that is currently displayed on the HMI
device.
The "Read from PLC" function causes the displayed tag values to be updated to match those
in the controller. The function overwrites any data changed on the Recipe view or Recipe
screen.
Requirements
The "Read from PLC" function has been configured.
On the HMI device, a recipe has been selected containing the recipe record with the
values that should be read from the controller.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select a recipe record with the values that should be read from the controller.
2. Touch the "From PLC" button.
The values are read from the controller.
3. Touch .
The recipe record is deleted. If the recipe record already exists, an alarm appears on the
screen.
Result
The values are read from the controller, displayed on the HMI device and saved to the
selected recipe record.
See also
Operator input in the overview (Page 10-9)
Configuring the transfer of recipe data records (Page 10-15)
Operating recipes
10.5 Using recipes
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
10-18 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
10.5.3 Transferring a recipe record to the PLC
Introduction
If you have changed values in the Recipe display or Recipe screen, you can transfer the
changed recipe record using the "Write record to PLC" function.
You can edit recipe records in the Recipe display or Recipe screen both offline and online.
You can only edit values offline in the Recipe display or Recipe screen. The configuration of
the recipe screen determines whether the recipe data are edited offline or online.
Tags offline
Data are only sent to the controller when the "To PLC" button is pressed.
Tags online
Data are transferred immediately to the controller.
Requirements
The "Write to controller" function has been configured.
On the HMI device, a recipe has been selected containing the recipe record with the
values that should be transferred to the controller.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Select a recipe record containing the values that should be transferred to the controller.
2. Touch the "To PLC" button.
Result
The values of the recipe record are transferred to the controller.
See also
Operator input in the overview (Page 10-9)
Configuring the transfer of recipe data records (Page 10-15)
Operating recipes
10.6 Displaying production sequences schematically
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 10-19
10.6 10.6 Displaying production sequences schematically
10.6.1 Entering a recipe data record
Introduction
You would like to enter production data on the HMI device without interrupting the process in
the machine or plant. Therefore, the production data should not be transferred to the PLC.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Open the Recipe view or Recipe screen.
2. Enter the name of a recipe record.
3. Enter the values for the elements.
4. Save recipe data record
The recipe record is saved in the internal data store of the HMI device.
The following figure shows the dataflow schematically.
5HFLSH
5HFLSH
5HFLSH
5HFLSHQ
LQWHUQDOGDWD
PHPRU\
5HFLSH
DGPLQLVWUDWLRQ
5HFLSHWDJV
+0,GHYLFH
3/&GHYLFH
0XOWL0HGLD&DUG
Figure 10-10 Schematic representation for entering a recipe record
Delete, save or save recipe record as
Load recipe record
Tags are not synchronized
Operating recipes
10.6 Displaying production sequences schematically
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
10-20 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
10.6.2 Manual production sequence
Introduction
The production data are requested by the controller based on the workpiece to be processed
and displayed on the HMI device for inspection. You want to correct the transferred
production data online, if necessary.
Procedure
A scanner connected to the controller reads the barcode of a workpiece. The barcode names
correspond to the names in the recipe record. Based on the barcode name, the controller
can read the required recipe record from the data store of the HMI device. The recipe record
is displayed for inspection on the HMI device. Changes made to the recipe record on the
HMI device are immediately transferred to the controller.
The following figure shows the dataflow schematically.
5HFLSH
5HFLSH
5HFLSH
5HFLSHQ
LQWHUQDOGDWD
PHPRU\
5HFLSH
DGPLQLVWUDWLRQ
5HFLSHWDJV
+0,GHYLFH
3/&GHYLFH
Figure 10-11 Schematic representation of a manual production sequence
Tags are synchronized
Tags are online for controller
Recipe record transfer – data communication between the data store of the HMI device and
the controller
Operating recipes
10.6 Displaying production sequences schematically
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 10-21
10.6.3 Automatic production sequence
Introduction
A production process is running automatically. The production data are transferred directly to
the controller either from the data medium in the HMI device or from an external data
medium. The values do not have to be displayed.
Procedure
Production can be controlled using one or more "Scripts", which transfer production records
automatically to the controller. The sequence of scripts can be checked using the return
values of the utilized functions.
The following figure shows the dataflow schematically.
5HFLSH
5HFLSH
5HFLSH
5HFLSHQ
LQWHUQDOGDWD
PHPRU\
5HFLSH
DGPLQLVWUDWLRQ
5HFLSHWDJV
+0,GHYLFH
3/&GHYLFH
0XOWL0HGLD&DUG
Figure 10-12 Schematic representation of an automatic production sequence
Tags are not synchronized
Tags are online for controller
Backup/restore – exporting recipe records
Backup/restore – importing recipe records
Operating recipes
10.6 Displaying production sequences schematically
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
10-22 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 11-1
Maintenance and service 11
11.1 11.1 Maintenance and upkeep
Scope of maintenance
The HMI device is designed for low maintenance operation. The touch screen and keyboard
membrane should nevertheless be cleaned regularly.
Preparation
Caution
Inadvertent operation
Always switch off the HMI device before cleaning it. This will ensure that you do not trigger
unintended functions when you touch the keys.
Requirements
Use a cleaning cloth dampened with a cleaning agent to clean the equipment. Only use
water with a little liquid soap or a screen cleaning foam.
Caution
Do not clean the HMI device with compressed air or steam jet blowers. Never use
aggressive solvents or scouring powder.
Procedure
Proceed as follows:
1. Switch off the HMI device
2. Spray a cleaning agent onto the cleaning cloth
Do not spray directly onto the HMI device.
3. Clean the HMI device
When cleaning the display wipe from the screen edge inwards.
Maintenance and service
11.2 Servicing and spare parts
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
11-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
11.2 11.2 Servicing and spare parts
Repairs
A defective device must be returned to the manufacturer's site for repair. The HMI device
may only be repaired at the manufacturer's site.
Service pack
A service pack can be ordered for servicing purposes. It contains the following spare parts:
Blind plugs for cable compartment
2 x screw joints for terminal box
1 set of screws for terminal box cover
2 x plug-in terminal strip (12-pin)
1 plug-in terminal strip (three-set block)
Blind flap for terminal box
Set of spare keys
If necessary, you can order a set of spare keys.
The service pack and the set of spare keys can be ordered from your Siemens agent.
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 12-1
Specifications 12
12.1 12.1 Dimensional Drawings
12.1.1 Mobile Panel
Device dimensions
Dimensions of Mobile Panel 177



Overall dimensions of the Mobile Panel 177 HMI device in the front view
Specifications
12.1 Dimensional Drawings
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
12-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0


r
Overall dimensions of the Mobile Panel 177 HMI device in the side view
Specifications
12.1 Dimensional Drawings
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 12-3
12.1.2 Wall holder
Device dimensions
Dimensions of wall mount





Figure 12-1 Dimensions of wall mount
Specifications
12.1 Dimensional Drawings
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
12-4 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
12.1.3 Terminal Box DP
Device dimensions
Dimensions of terminal box








s

Figure 12-2 Dimensions of terminal box
Specifications
12.1 Dimensional Drawings
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 12-5
12.1.4 Terminal Box PN
Device dimensions
Dimensions of the Terminal Box PN



 




s
Figure 12-3 Dimensions of the Terminal Box PN
Specifications
12.2 Technical specifications
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
12-6 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
12.2 12.2 Technical specifications
12.2.1 Mobile Panel
HMI device
Weight without packaging Approx. 1.3 kg
Display
Type Color-STN LCD
Display area, active 115 mm x 86 mm (5.7")
Resolution 320 x 240 pixels
Colors, displayable 256 colors
Contrast control Yes
Back-lighting
Half Brightness Life Time, typical
CCFL
50 000 h
Input unit
Type Touch screen, analog, resistive
Membrane keyboard
Softkeys 14 (F1 to F8 with LED)
Enable switch 2-circuit, 3-stage
supply voltage: 24 V DC
amperage, max.: 400 mA
amperage, min.: 10 mA
STOP button (optional) 2-circuit
supply voltage: 24 V DC
amperage, max.: 500 mA
amperage, min.: 10 mA
These are normally closed contacts.
Handwheel (optional)
Key-operated switch (optional) 3 switch settings
Illuminated pushbutton (optional)
Memory
Application memory 2048 KB
Specifications
12.2 Technical specifications
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 12-7
Voltage supply
Voltage supply Via terminal box
Additional specifications
Fall height max. 1.5 m
12.2.2 Terminal Box DP
Terminal Box DP
Weight without packaging Approx. 500 g
Voltage supply
Nominal voltage
Range, permissible
+24 V DC
20.4 V to 28.8 V (–15%, +20%)
Transients, maximum permissible 35 V (500 msec)
Time between two transients, minimum 50 s
Current consumption Terminal Box DP without panel
Typical
Constant current, maximum
Power on current surge I2t
Approx. 100 mA
Approx. 150 mA
Approx. 0.5 A2s
Current consumption Terminal Box DP with panel
Typical
Constant current, maximum
Power on current surge I2t
Approx. 350 mA
Approx. 450 mA
Approx. 0.5 A2s
Fuse protection, internal Electronic
Current load PLC-accompanying signals Max. 100 mA
Note
Recovery time
Wait for approx. one second after you have removed the connecting cable from the terminal
box before you plug the connecting cable back into the terminal box.
After power failures lasting less than one second the connecting cable has to be
disconnected.
Specifications
12.2 Technical specifications
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
12-8 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
12.2.3 Terminal Box PN
Terminal Box PN
Weight without packaging Approx. 700 g
Voltage supply
Nominal voltage
Range, permissible
+24 V DC
20.4 V to 28.8 V (–15%, +20%)
Transients, maximum permissible 35 V (500 msec)
Time between two transients, minimum 50 s
Current consumption Terminal Box PN without panel
Typical
Constant current, maximum
Power on current surge I2t
Approx. 100 mA
Approx. 150 mA
Approx. 0.5 A2s
Current consumption Terminal Box PN with panel
Typical
Constant current, maximum
Power on current surge I2t
Approx. 450 mA
Approx. 500 mA
Approx. 0.5 A2s
Fuse protection, internal Electronic
Current load PLC-accompanying signals Max. 100 mA
Note
Recovery time
Wait for approx. one second after you have removed the connecting cable from the terminal
box before you plug the connecting cable back into the terminal box.
After power failures lasting less than one second the connecting cable has to be
disconnected.
Specifications
12.3 Interface allocation Mobile Panel 177 DP
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 12-9
12.3 12.3 Interface allocation Mobile Panel 177 DP
12.3.1 RS 485 (IF 2)
Sub-d socket, 9-pin, with screw lock

Figure 12-4 RS 485 interface pin assignment
PIN Assignment
1 n. c.
2 GND 24 V
3 Data channel B (+)
4 n. c.
5 GND 5 V, floating potential
6 +5 V DC, floating potential
7 +24 V DC, out (max. 100 mA)
8 Data channel A (–)
9 n. c.
12.3.2 RJ45
RJ45 connector for the connecting cable

Figure 12-5 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector
PIN Assignment
1 RxD-B
2 RxD-A
3 CTS-B / ID-
4 RTS-B / IC-
5 RTS-A / IC+
6 CTS-A / ID+
7 TxD-B
8 TxD-A
Specifications
12.4 Interface assignment Mobile Panel 177 PN
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
12-10 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
12.3.3 Female header
Female header for the connecting cable


Figure 12-6 Pin assignment of 10-pin female header
PIN Assignment Circuit
1 +24 V DC
2 GND 24 V
Power supply
3 Stop 23
4 Stop 24
5 Stop 13
6 Stop 14
Stop circuit
7 Enable 1+
8 Enable 1–
9 Enable 2+
10 Enable 2–
Enable circuit
12.4 12.4 Interface assignment Mobile Panel 177 PN
12.4.1 RS 485 (IF 2)
Sub-d socket, 9-pin, with screw lock

Figure 12-7 RS 485 interface pin assignment
PIN Assignment
1 n. c.
2 GND 24 V
3 Data channel B (+)
4 n. c.
5 GND 5 V, floating potential
6 +5 V DC, floating potential
7 +24 V DC, out (max. 100 mA)
8 Data channel A (–)
9 n. c.
Specifications
12.4 Interface assignment Mobile Panel 177 PN
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 12-11
12.4.2 RJ45
RJ45 connector for the connecting cable

Figure 12-8 Pin assignment of the RJ45 connector
PIN Assignment
1 TD+
2 TD-
3 RD+
4 n. c.
5 n. c.
6 RD-
7 ICD+
8 ICD–
12.4.3 Female header
Female header for the connecting cable


Figure 12-9 Pin assignment of 12-pin female header
PIN Assignment Circuit
1 +24 V DC
2 GND 24 V
Power supply
3 Stop 23
4 Stop 24
5 Stop 13
6 Stop 14
Stop circuit
7 Enable 1+
8 Enable 1–
9 Enable 2+
10 Enable 2–
Enable circuit
11 ICD+
12 ICD–
Box ID
Specifications
12.5 Interface assignment Terminal Box DP
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
12-12 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
12.5 12.5 Interface assignment Terminal Box DP
Position of the ports
Figure 12-10 Position of the ports
Terminal strip 1
Fast connector
Terminal strip 2
Caution
When connecting the cables to the terminal strips ensure that the assignments for Terminal
strips 1 and 2 are not reversed.
Terminal strip 1: IF1 and power supply

Figure 12-11 Assignment of 12-pin terminal strip 1
Specifications
12.5 Interface assignment Terminal Box DP
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 12-13
Pin RS 232
IF 1A
9-pin
pin
RS 232
IF 1A
15-pin
socket
RS 422
IF 1B
9-pin
socket
RS 485
IF 1B
9-pin
socket
Power supply
1 CTS (8) CTS (5) n. c. n. c. n. c.
2 RTS (7) RTS (10) n. c. n. c. n. c.
3 TxD (3) TxD (4) n. c. n. c. n. c.
4 RxD (2) RxD (3) n. c. n. c. n. c.
5 M (5) M (15) M (5) M (5) n. c.
6 n. c. n. c. TxD+ (3) Bus + (B) (3) n. c.
7 n. c. n. c. TxD– (8) Bus - (A) (8) n. c.
8 n. c. n. c. RxD+ (4) n. c. n. c.
9 n. c. n. c. RxD– (9) n. c. n. c.
10 PI PE PE PE PE
11 n. c. n. c. n. c. n. c. M24
12 n. c. n. c. n. c. n. c. P24
The values in parentheses in the table correspond to the pin numbers of the standard cables
described in the WinCC flexible online help for each coupling.
Fast connector
Figure 12-12 Assignment of 4-pin Fast Connector
Pin Assignment
1 LTG-A (–) IN
2 LTG-B (+) IN
3 LTG-A (–) OUT
4 LTG-B (+) OUT
Specifications
12.5 Interface assignment Terminal Box DP
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
12-14 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Terminal strip 2: Safety Functions and Supplemental Functions

Figure 12-13 Assignment of 12-pin terminal strip 2
Pin Internal interconnection Name Circuit
1 Stop 13
2 Stop 14
3 Stop 23
4 Stop 24
STOP button
See Female header
5 +24 V1)
6 STOP button depressed 32 1)
7 Mobile Panel plugged 31
8
+24 V1)
PLC-accompanying
signals
9 Enable 2+
10 Enable 1–
11 Enable 1+
12 Enable 2–
Enable switch
See Female header
1) Applies to Terminal Box Plus
The Terminal Box Basic does not have the "STOP button pressed" signal.
The "STOP button depressed" signal has no error detection and, therefore, must not be used
for safety-critical applications!
Specifications
12.6 Interface assignment Terminal Box PN
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 12-15
"Mobile Panel plugged" signal
Mobile Panel on the Terminal Box Signal at the digital input of the controller
Not plugged "0"
Plugged "1"
Note
The "Mobile Panel plugged" output of the Terminal Box Basic is connected to the power
supply. In the case of the Terminal Box Plus, this output is fed to a relay using two pins.
Observe the following points when connecting the "Mobile Panel plugged" signal:
Connect terminal strip 2, pin 7 of the terminal box to the digital input of the controller
Terminal Box Basic Terminal strip 2, pin 8 of the terminal box remains free
Terminal Box Plus: +24 V have to be supplied to terminal strip 2, pin 8
12.6 12.6 Interface assignment Terminal Box PN
Position of the ports
Figure 12-14 Position of the ports
Fast connector
Terminal strip 1
Terminal strip 2
Specifications
12.6 Interface assignment Terminal Box PN
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
12-16 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Fast connector
The terminal box contains two fast connectors for connecting to PROFINET.
Figure 12-15 Assignment of 4-pin fast connector
Pin Assignment
1 TD+
2 RD+
3 TD-
4 RD-
Terminal strip 1: Power supply
Figure 12-16 Assignment of 3-pin terminal strip 1
Pin Power supply
1 PE
2 M24
3 P24
Specifications
12.6 Interface assignment Terminal Box PN
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 12-17
Terminal strip 2: Safety Functions and supplemental functions

Figure 12-17 Assignment of 12-pin terminal strip 2
Pin Internal interconnection Name Circuit
1 Stop 13
2 Stop 14
3 Stop 23
4 Stop 24
STOP button
See female header
5 +24 V1)
6 STOP button depressed 32 1)
7 Mobile Panel plugged 31
8
+24 V1)
PLC-accompanying
signals
9 Enable 2+
10 Enable 1–
11 Enable 1+
12 Enable 2–
Enable switch
See female header
1) Applies to Terminal Box Plus
The Terminal Box Basic does not have the "STOP button pressed" signal.
The "STOP button depressed" signal has no error detection and, therefore, must not be used
for safety-critical applications!
"Mobile Panel plugged" signal
Mobile Panel on the Terminal Box Signal at the digital input of the controller
Not plugged "0"
Plugged "1"
Note
The "Mobile Panel plugged" output of the Terminal Box Basic is connected to the power
supply. In the case of the Terminal Box Plus, this output is fed to a relay using two pins.
Specifications
12.7 Connection examples for Enable switch and STOP button
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
12-18 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Observe the following points when connecting the "Mobile Panel plugged" signal:
Connect terminal strip 2, pin 7 of the terminal box to the digital input of the controller
Terminal Box Basic Terminal strip 2, pin 8 of the terminal box remains free
Terminal Box Plus: +24 V have to be supplied to terminal strip 2, pin 8
12.7 12.7 Connection examples for Enable switch and STOP button
Introduction
This section presents connection examples for the Enable switch and STOP button for safety
category 3 in accordance with EN 954-1.
All KA and KB contacts must be positively driven.
Notice
To ensure safety category 3 in accordance with EN 954-1, be sure to follow the operating
instructions for the monitoring device being used.
Specifications
12.7 Connection examples for Enable switch and STOP button
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 12-19
Connection example 1: Enabling switch with monitoring device ELAN SRB-NA-R-C.27/S1
The following figure shows the connection of a monitoring device ELAN SRB-NA-R-C.27/S1
to the enabling switch of the Mobile Panel.
)
6
.
.
.
. . .
6
. .
. .
.
.
.
& & 6 6 6 6 6    
  
/'/
/'
)
$W $W
6
6
/ / /
.$
.%
0
;  




'&
9 .$ .%
/
*1'
.$
1
*1'
.$ .%
0RELOH3DQHO
(63
(60
(63
(60
(/$1
65%1$5&6
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOHV
PLQPP&X
7ZRHQDEOLQJVZLWFKHV
VWDJHDQGFLUFXLWHDFK
(6OHIW (6ULJKW
&LUFXLW
&LUFXLW
(6&LUFXLW (6&LUFXLW
(YDOXDWLRQ
HOHFWURQLFV
7HUPLQDO%R[%DVLF
RU
7HUPLQDO%R[3OXV
&URVVRYHUFLUFXLW
UHFRJQLWLRQ
0RGXOHUHDU
Figure 12-18 Wiring diagram: Enabling switch with monitoring device ELAN SRB-NA-R-C.27/S1
S1 and S4 switches on the rear of the module must be at Position 0.
Specifications
12.7 Connection examples for Enable switch and STOP button
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
12-20 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Connection example 2: Enabling switch on monitoring device PILZ PST1
The following figure shows the connection of a monitoring device PILZ PST1 to the enabling
switch of the Mobile Panel.
.
.
3,/=
367
$
;
 




$ ; ;  6
$

  6 6
6
.$ .% $W
$I
$W
$I
*1'
.$ .%
*1' *1'
9'& 9'& 9'&
0RELOH3DQHO
/ / /
.$
.%
0
(63
(60
(63
(60
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOHV
PLQPP&X
7ZRHQDEOLQJVZLWFKHV
VWDJHDQGFLUFXLWHDFK
(6OHIW (6ULJKW
&LUFXLW
&LUFXLW
(6&LUFXLW (6&LUFXLW
(YDOXDWLRQ
HOHFWURQLFV
7HUPLQDO%R[%DVLF
RU
7HUPLQDO%R[3OXV
,QSXWFLUFXLW
,QSXWFLUFXLW
)HHGEDFNORRS
RU RU
Figure 12-19 Wiring diagram: Enabling switch on monitoring device PILZ PST1
Specifications
12.7 Connection examples for Enable switch and STOP button
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 12-21
Connection example 3: STOP button with SIGUARD 3TK2840 monitoring device
The following figure shows the connection of a monitoring device SIGUARD 3TK2840 to the
STOP button of the Mobile Panel.
6,*8$5'
7.
/ / /
.$
.%
0
< <  <
$
*1'
.$ .%
*1' *1'
<
&75/
&75/
35(6
35(6
6723
;
6723
6723
6723
< < <
$
.$
.%
0RELOH3DQHO
9'&
&LUFXLW
&LUFX
LW
&LUFX
LW
6723EXWWRQ
FLUFXLWSRVLWLYHRSHQLQJ
7HUPLQDO%R[%DVLF
RU
7HUPLQDO%R[3OXV
&RQQHFWLQJFDEOHV
2XWSXWV
0RQLWRULQJ
6723FLUFOH
RU
(0(5*(1&<
6723FLUFXLW
&LUFXLW
21
Figure 12-20 Wiring diagram: STOP button with SIGUARD 3TK2840 monitoring device
Monitoring outputs may not be used for safety-related functions.
Specifications
12.7 Connection examples for Enable switch and STOP button
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
12-22 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 A-1
A Appendix A
A.1 A. 1 Connection point recognition
A.1.1 Function method
Introduction
You can divide a system into several zones or functional areas by using several terminal
boxes. For this purpose it may be necessary for different system screens to be displayed,
depending on the terminal box used.
This is achieved by means of connection point recognition.
Note
The following sections are intended for the configuring engineer of the HMI device.
Note
If the same screens and functions are used predominantly for all PLCs and the PLCs are of
the same type, the configuration can be designed in such a way that only one PLC
connection is configured.
The configuring engineer can enable you to switch between the various PLCs usig a single
operating object.
Connection point recognition
You can implement the connection point recognition as follows:
Reading out of the box ID set in the terminal box by the HMI device
Wiring the terminal box to a digital input of the PLC.
Note
Connection point recognition via box ID
The solution with box ID functions for different system configurations.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
A-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Note
The "Project ID" range pointer can be used to ensure that the HMI device is connected to
the PLC that forms the basis of the project.
The "Project ID" range pointer can be assigned to only one PLC for each project (see
"WinCC flexible Communication" user manual).
Note
A box ID cannot be set in a terminal box of the Mobile Panel 170. In this case connection
point recognition is only possible via the digital input of the controller.
A.1.2 Connection point recognition via box ID
Box ID
You can read out the box ID of the terminal box to which the Mobile Panel 177 is connected
in the project.
Note
If you connect the Mobile Panel 177 to a terminal box of the Mobile Panel 170, the value 255
is always supplied as the box ID.
Requirements
You have set the respective box ID in each of the terminal boxes. Each terminal box must
have a unique box ID assigned to it.
Example for the evaluation of the current box ID
In order to ensure that the box ID is transferred correctly to the controller when the HMI
device is plugged in, proceed as follows when carrying out configuration in WinCC flexible:
1. Specify the connection to the PLC in the "Connections" editor. Activate the "Coordination"
area pointer to ensure that the live bit is available on the PLC side.
2. Create three tags in the "Tag" editor.
Internal tag: "Internal_Box-ID"
External tag: "Auxiliary Tag"
External tag: "External_Box-ID"
3. Open the "Device settings" editor.
4. Select the "Internal_Box-ID" tag in the "Settings for runtime" section at the "Access point".
When you connect the HMI device to the terminal box, the box ID is written automatically
into the "Internal_Box-ID" tag.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 A-3
5. When communication is established between the HMI device and controller, the old value
currently existing in the controller is then written automatically into the "External_Box-ID"
tag. The "Auxiliary Tag" is required so that the current value of the box ID can be
transferred to the PLC.
6. A program in the PLC evaluates the live bit. After the control program has determined
that communication has been established, the control program changes the current value
of the "Auxiliary_ Tag" tag once in order to induce a change in value.
7. The value change in the "Auxiliary_ Tag" executes the "SetValue" system function. The
system function now re-assigns the value of the "Internal_Box-ID" tags to the
"External_Box-ID" tags.
8. To configure this system function open the properties view of the "Auxiliary Tag". Click
"Change value" in the properties view of the "Auxiliary_Tag" tag in the "Events" group.
The "Function list" dialog box opens. Click the first line of the function list. The list opens,
showing the system functions available in the project.
9. Select the system function "SetValue" from the "Calculation" group. Select the
"External_Box-ID" tag at "Tag (output)". Select the "Internal_Box-ID" tag at "Value".
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
A-4 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Result
The box ID of the terminal box to which the Mobile Panel 177 is connected is transferred to
the controller.
See also
Setting the box ID at the terminal box (Page 4-8)
A.2 A. 2 Evaluation of the operator control elements
A.2.1 Overview
Operator control elements
The following information can be transferred between the HMI device and the controller:
Direction pulses of the handwheel
Status of the softkeys
Status of the key-operated switch
Status of the illuminated pushbutton
Status of the LEDs of softkeys and illuminated pushbuttons
There are two alternatives:
Direct keys
System functions of WnCC flexible
Note
The following sections are intended for the configuring engineer of the HMI device.
See also
Direct keys (Page 8-4)
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 A-5
A.2.2 Evaluating operator control elements as direct keys
Introduction
You can configure the operator control elements of the HMI device as direct keys.
Direction pulses of the handwheel and the switch state of the softkeys, key-operated switch,
or illuminated pushbutton are then directly available in the I/O area of the PLC.
Byte assignment
The following figure shows the byte assignment in the I/O area for the operator control
elements of the HMI device.
%XWWRQELWV /('ELWV
%\WH
) ) ) ) ) ) ) )

) ) ) ) ) )
7 6 6
, , , , , , , ,
' ' ' ' ' ' ' '
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
) ) ) ) ) ) ) )

7
Figure A-1 Byte assignment of the keys and LEDs in the I/O area of the PLC
F Bit for softkey
S Bit for key-operated switch
T Bit for illuminated pushbutton
I Bit for handwheel pulses, forwards
D Bit for handwheel pulses, backwards
Bit coding
The following tables show the bit coding for softkeys, key-operated switch, illuminated
pushbutton and handwheel:
Bit coding of fsoftkeys
Status F1 to F14
Not pressed 0
Pressed 1
Bit coding of LEDs of softkeys
Status F1 to F8
LED not illuminated 0
LED is illuminated 1
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
A-6 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Bit coding of key-operated switch
Status S1 S0 Key position
Position 0 0 0 In middle position
Position I 0 1 Turned clockwise to the
end stop
Position II 1 0 Turned
counterclockwise to the
end stop
Bit coding of illuminated pushbutton
Status T0
Not pressed 0
Pressed 1
LED status T1
Off 0
Continuously illuminated 1
Bit coding of handwheel
A setpoint is not specified for the handwheel.
After startup of the HMI device, bytes n+3 to n+4 (see figure) are set to zero.
Rotation of the handwheel produces positive or negative pulses depending on the
rotation direction. The number of positive pulses is stored in bits I0-I7, and the number
of negative pulses is stored in Bits D0-D7.
Values are entered in binary format, whereby Bit 0 is the least significant bit and Bit 7
is the most significant bit.
A complete handwheel revolution yields 50 pulses.
Each pulse of the handwheel is added to the appropriate byte (n+3 or n+4),
depending on the direction or rotation. There are no negative values. If the possible
value range is exceeded, an overflow occurs.
If a value of 255 is increased by one pulse, a value of 0 results.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 A-7
Example of bit coding for handwheel
The following table contains an example showing how to determine the rotation direction
using pulses stored in Bytes n+3 and n+4 that were measured between time t1 and t4.
The numbers in the following table represent a byte in the PLC.
Handwheel Evaluation
time Pulses, forwards Pulses, backwards
Evaluation
t1 255 (≙ -1) 245 (≙= -11) --
t2 10 245 (≙ -11) Pulses, forwards: 11
Pulses, backwards: 0
Resulting value: +11
t3 10 4 Pulses, forwards: 0
Pulses, backwards: 15
Resulting value: -15
t4 15 5 Pulses, forwards: 5
Pulses, backwards: 1
Resulting value: +4
Based on the difference in pulses at times tn and tn+1, the resulting value and, thus, the
rotation direction can be determined. From the table, take the number of pulses forwards and
pulses backwards
at the tim tn and
at time tn+1.
From this, you determine the resulting value. This is calculated as:
Resulting value =
pulses, forwards, tn+1 - pulses, backwards, tn - (pulses, backwards, tn+1 - pulses, backwards,
tn)
Response time
Bytes n+3 and n+4 must be scanned on the PLC side within a second and cyclically. This
ensures that no more than 256 pulses can be added between two scans of the handwheel.
For 256 pulses, approximately 4.5 revolutions of the handwheel are required.
The rotary pulse encoder supplies a maximum of 200 pulses per second.
Notice
The input pulses should take effect immediately on the PLC and cause a response in the
system. Therefore, set up a scan cycle <= 100 ms in the PLC to achieve this.
See also
Direct keys (Page 8-4)
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
A-8 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
A.2.3 Evaluating operator control elements via WinCC flexible system functions
A.2.3.1 LED control of the softkeys
Application
LEDs are integrated in the softkeys F1 to F8 of the Mobile Panel 177. The integrated LEDs
can be activated by the controller.
The LED can assume the following states:
Off
Slow flashing
Rapid flashing
On
This allows the LED to signalise to the operatorthat he should press the softkey in an active
project.
Bit assignment
The following table shows the bit assignment for the LED tag of the softkey LEDs:
Bit n+1 Bit n LED status
0 0 Off
0 1 Rapid flashing
1 0 Slow flashing
1 1 On (continuous)
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 A-9
A.2.3.2 Basic procedure
Introduction
You can use WinCC flexible system functions to evaluate the operator control elements of
the HMI device or to control the LEDs of the softkeys and of the illuminated pushbutton.
Direction pulses of the handwheel and the switch state of the softkeys, key-operated switch,
or illuminated pushbutton are then transferred via tags to the PLC.
Consistent data
If tags with process interface are assigned directly to the operator control elements, this may,
for example, result in inconsistent values of the operator control elements between operator
control element, HMI device and PLC.
1. The HMI device is connected directly to the terminal box.
2. The HMI device starts.
3. The values of the operator control elements are determined and entered in the tags in the
HMI device.
4. Communication between the HMI device and PLC is established.
5. After communication has been established, the old values of the tags are transferred from
the PLC into the tags of the HMI device.
6. Not until a change has been carried out to an operator control element, is the valid value
written into the tag of the HMI device and transferred to the PLC.
Procedure
In order to ensure consistent values for the operator control elements, proceed as follows
when configuring in WinCC flexible:
1. Specify the connection to the PLC in the "Connections" editor. Activate the "Coordination"
area pointer to ensure that the live bit is available to the PLC side.
2. Create three tags in the "Tag" editor.
Internal tag: "Status_Control_Element"
External tag: "Auxiliary_Tag"
External tag: "Control_Element_PLC"
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
A-10 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
3. For illuminated pushbuttons, key-operated switches and handwheels (global assignment):
Open the template in the "Screens" editor. Select the operator control element in the
template. Click on the "General" group in the properties window. Select the
"Status_Control_Element" tag at "Tag" in the "Settings" section. When you operate the
operator control element, the value is written into the "Status_Control_Element" tag. For
illuminated pushbuttons you can additionally configure the "LED_Tag" tag in order to
control the integrated LED.
Figure A-2 Tag assignment using illuminated pushbuttons as an example
4. For a handwheel (local assignment):
Open the screen in which you want to assign the handwheel locally in the "Screens"
editor. Configure the function "ConnectTagWithHandwheel" on a command button or
directly into the screen structure. Select the "Status_Control_Element" tag at "Value".
When you operate the operator control element, the value is written into the
"Status_Control_Element" tag.
5. The "Control_Element_PLC" tag writes the value of the "Status_Control_Element" tags
into the PLC. The "SetValue" system function has to configured at the
"Status_Control_Element" tag in order for the value to be transferred.
6. Open the properties window of the "Status_Control_Element" tag. Click "Change value" in
the properties view of the "Status_Control_Element" tag in the "Events" group. The
"Function list" dialog box opens. Click the first line of the function list. The list appears,
showing the available project functions.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 A-11
7. Select the system function "SetValue" from the "Calculation" group. Select the
"Control_Element_PLC" tag at "Tag (output)". Select the "Status_Control_Element" tag at
"Value".
8. When communication is established, the possibly old value currently existing in the
controller is then written automatically into the "Control_Element_PLC" tag. The "Auxiliary
Tag" is required for transfer of the current status of the operator control element to the
PLC.
9. A program in the PLC evaluates the live bit. After the control program has determined
that communication has been established, the control program changes the current value
of the "Auxiliary_Tag" tag once in order to induce a change in value. The value change in
the "Auxiliary_Tag" triggers performance of the "SetValue" system function. The system
function assigns the value of the "Status_Control_Element" tag again to the
"Control_Element_PLC" tag. In order to configure the system function, open the
properties window of the "Auxiliary Tag".
10. Click "Change value" in the properties window of the "Auxiliary_Tag" tag in the "Events"
group. The "Function list" dialog box appears. Click the first line of the function list. The
list opens, showing the available project functions.
11. Select the system function "SetValue" from the "Calculation" group. Select the
"Control_Element_PLC" tag at "Tag (output)". Select the "Status_Control_Element" tag at
"Value".
Result
The values for the operator control elements are consistent between operator control
element, HMI device and PLC.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
A-12 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
A.2.3.3 Illuminated pushbutton
Application
The illuminated pushbutton is an optional operator control element of the Mobile Panel 177.
The integrated LED can be actuated from the PLC.
The LED can assume the following states:
Off
Slow flashing
Rapid flashing
On
This allows the LED to signalise to the operator that he should operate the illuminated
pushbutton in the active project.
Bit assignment
The following table shows the bit assignment for the status tag of the illuminated pushbutton:
Bit 0 Status of the illuminated pushbutton
0 Pressed
1 Not pressed
The following table shows the bit assignment for the LED tag of the illuminated pushbutton:
Bit n+1 Bit n LED status
0 0 Off
0 1 Rapid flashing
1 0 Slow flashing
1 1 On (continuous)
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 A-13
A.2.3.4 Key-operated switch
Application
The key-operated switch is an optional operator control element of the Mobile Panel 177. In
an active project the key-operated switch is used to lock functions that are triggered by the
Mobile Panel 177.
Bit assignment
The following table shows the bit assignment for the tag of the key-operated switch:
Bit 1 Bit 0 Key position
0 0 In central position
1 0 Turned clockwise to the end
stop
0 1 Turned counterclockwise to the
end stop
Note
If you use a tag of the "Boolean" type for the key-operated switch, the following assignment
applies:
Status "0": Central position of the key-operated switch
Status "1": Key-operated switch turned clockwise or counterclockwise to the end stop
A.2.3.5 Handwheel
Application
The handwheel is an optional operator control element of the Mobile Panel 177. In an active
project you can input incremental values with the handwheel.
Evaluation of the incremental values
If the signals of the handwheel are assigned to a WinCC flexible tag, the forwards and
backwards increments are offset against each other and the absolute value of the
increments is specified. The maximum or minimum value of the increments until an overflow
depends on the type of tags assigned.
A complete handwheel revolution yields 50 pulses. The rotary pulse encoder supplies a
maximum of 200 pulses per second.
Example
The handwheel has a starting value of 120 increments.
The wheel rotates 10 increments forwards and 3 increments backwards.
This results in a new value of 127 increments.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
A-14 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
A.3 A. 3 ESD Guidelines
What does ESD mean?
All electronic modules are equipped with highly integrated modules or components. Based
on their design, these electronic components are highly sensitive to overvoltage and thus to
discharge of static electricity. These electronic components are therefore specially identified
as ESD.
Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are commonly used for electrostatic sensitive devices:
ESD – Electrostatic Sensitive Devices
ESD – Electrostatic Sensitive Device as common international designation
Labels
ESD modules are labeled with the following symbol:
Figure A-3 ESD label
Electrostatic Charge
Caution
Electrostatic Charge
ESDs may be destroyed by voltages well below the perception threshold of persons
Voltages of this kind develop when a component or an assembly is touched by a person who
is not grounded against static electricity. Usually, it is unlikely that damage to an ESD as a
result of overvoltage is detected immediately but may become apparent only after a longer
period of operation.
Prevent electrostatic charge of your body before you touch the ESD!
Anyone who is not connected to the electrical potential of their surroundings is subjected to
electrostatic charge.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 A-15
The figure indicates the maximum electrostatic charge anyone is subjected to when
contacting the materials shown. These values correspond with specifications to IEC 801-2.
9ROWDJH
5HODWLYHDWPRVSKHULFKXPLGLW\






       


>9@
>@
Figure A-4 Electrostatic voltages with which a person can be charged.
Synthetic materials
Wool
Antistatic materials such as wood or concrete
Protective Measures against Discharge of Static Electricity
Caution
Grounding Measures
When working with electrostatic sensitive devices, make sure that the person, the workplace
and the packaging are properly grounded. This helps to avoid electrostatic charge.
As a rule, only touch the ESD if this is unavoidable. Example: for maintenance. When you
touch modules, make sure that you do not touch the pins on the modules or the PCB tracks.
This prevents any discharge of static electricity to sensitive component and thus avoids
damage.
Discharge electrostatic electricity from your body if you are performing measurements on an
ESD. To do so, touch a grounded metallic object.
Always use grounded measuring instruments.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
A-16 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
A.4 A. 4 System alarms
Introduction
System alarms on the HMI device provide information about internal states of the HMI device
and PLC.
The overview below shows the causes of system alarms and how to eliminate the cause of
error.
Depending on scope of functions, only parts of the system alarms described in this section
apply to the various HMI devices.
Note
System alarms are only indicated if an alarm window was configured. System alarms are
output in the language currently set on your HMI device.
System Alarm Parameters
System alarms may contain encrypted parameters which are relevant to troubleshooting
because they provide a reference to the source code of the Runtime software. These
parameters are output after the text "Error code:"
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 A-17
Meaning of the System Alarms
Number Effect/cause Remedy
10000 The print job could not be started or was canceled
due to an unknown error. Faulty printer setup. Or:
No permission is available for accessing the
network printer.
Power supply failure during data transfer.
Check the printer settings, cable connections and the
power supply.
Set up the printer once again. Obtain a network printer
authorization.
If the error persists, contact the Hotline!
10001 No printer is installed or a default printer has not
been set up.
Install a printer and/or select it as the default printer.
10002 Overflow of the graphics buffer for printing. Up to
two images are buffered.
Allow sufficient intervals between successive print jobs.
10003 Images can now be buffered again.
10004 Overflow of the buffer for printing lines in text mode
(e.g.alarms). Up to 1000 lines are buffered.
Allow sufficient intervals between successive print jobs.
10005 Text lines can now be buffered again.
10006 The Windows printing system reports an error.
Refer to the output text and the error ID to
determine the possible causes. Nothing is printed
or the print is faulty.
Repeat the action if necessary.
20010 An error has occurred in the specified script line.
Execution of the script was therefore aborted. Note
the system alarm that may have occurred prior to
this.
Select the specified script line in the configuration.
Ensure that the tags used are of the allowed types.
Check system functions for the correct number and types
of parameters.
20011 An error has occurred in a script that was called by
the specified script.
Execution of the script was therefore aborted in the
called script.
Take the system alarm that may have occurred
prior to this into account.
In the configuration, select the script that has been called
directly or indirectly by the specified script.
Ensure that the tags used are of the allowed types.
Check the system functions for the correct number and
type of parameters.
20012 The configuration data is inconsistent. The script
could therefore not be generated.
Recompile the configuration.
20013 The scripting component of WinCC flexible Runtime
is not correctly installed. Therefore, no scripts can
be executed.
Reinstall WinCC flexible Runtime.
20014 The system function returns a value that is not
written in any return tag.
Select the specified script in the configuration.
Check if the script name has been assigned a value.
20015 Too many successive scripts have been triggered
in short intervals. When more than 20 scripts are
queued for processing, any subsequent scripts are
rejected. In this case, the script indicated in the
alarm is not executed.
Find what is triggering the scripts. Extend the times, e.g.
the polling time of the tags which trigger the scripts.
30010 The tag could not accept the function result, e.g.
when it has exceeded the value range.
Check the tag type of the system function parameter.
30011 A system function could not be executed because
the function was assigned an invalid value or type
in the parameter.
Check the parameter value and tag type of the invalid
parameter. If a tag is used as a parameter, check its
value.
40010 The system function could not be executed since
the parameters could not be converted to a
common tag type.
Check the parameter types in the configuration.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
A-18 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Number Effect/cause Remedy
40011 The system function could not be executed since
the parameters could not be converted to a
common tag type.
Check the parameter types in the configuration.
50000 The HMI device is receiving data faster than it is
capable of processing. Therefore, no further data is
accepted until all current data have been
processed. Data exchange then resumes.
50001 Data exchange has been resumed.
60000 This alarm is generated by the
“DisplaySystemAlarms” function. The text to be
displayed is transferred to the function as a
parameter.
60010 The file could not be copied in the direction defined
because one of the two files is currently open or the
source/target path is not available.
It is possible that the Windows user has no access
rights to one of the two files.
Restart the system function or check the paths of the
source/target files. Using Windows NT/2000/XP: The user
executing WinCC flexible Runtime must be granted
access rights for the files.
60011 An attempt was made to copy a file to itself.
It is possible that the Windows user has no access
rights to one of the two files.
Check the path of the source/target file.
Using Windows NT/2000/XP with NTFS: The user
executing WinCC flexible Runtime must be granted
access rights for the files.
70010 The application could not be started because it
could not be found in the path specified or there is
insufficient memory space.
Check if the application exists in the specified path or
close other applications.
70011 The system time could not be modified.
The error alarm only appears in connection with
area pointer "Date/time PC". Possible causes:
An invalid time was transferred in the job
mailbox.
The Windows user has no right to modify the
system time.
If the first parameter in the system alarm is
displayed with the value 13, the second parameter
indicates the byte containing the incorrect value.
Check the time which is to be set.
Using Windows NT/2000/XP: The user executing WinCC
flexible Runtime must be granted the right to change the
system time of the operating system.
70012 An error occurred when executing the function
"StopRuntime" with the option "Runtime and
operating system".
Windows and WinCC flexible Runtime are not
closed.
One possible cause is that other programs cannot
be closed.
Close all programs currently running.
Then close Windows.
70013 The system time could not be modified because an
invalid value was entered. Incorrect separators may
have been used.
Check the time which is to be set.
70014 The system time could not be modified. Possible
causes:
An invalid time was transferred.
The Windows user has no right to modify the
system time.
Windows rejects the setting request.
Check the time which is to be set.
Using Windows NT/2000/XP: The user executing WinCC
flexible Runtime must be granted the right to change the
system time of the operating system.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 A-19
Number Effect/cause Remedy
70015 The system time could not be read because
Windows rejects the reading function.
70016 An attempt was made to select a screen by means
of a system function or job. This is not possible
because the screen number specified does not
exist.
Or: A screen could not be generated due to
insufficient system memory.
Check the screen number in the function or job with the
screen numbers configured.
Assign the number to a screen if necessary.
70017 Date/Time is not read from the area pointer
because the address set in the controller is either
not available or has not been set up.
Change the address or set up the address in the
controller.
70018 Acknowledgment that the password list has been
successfully imported.
70019 Acknowledgment that the password list has been
successfully exported.
70020 Acknowledgment for activation of alarm reporting.
70021 Acknowledgment for deactivation of alarm
reporting.
70022 Acknowledgment to starting the Import Password
List action.
70023 Acknowledgment to starting the Export Password
List action.
70024 The value range of the tag has been exceeded in
the system function.
The calculation of the system function is not
performed.
Check the desired calculation and correct it if necessary.
70025 The value range of the tag has been exceeded in
the system function.
The calculation of the system function is not
performed.
Check the desired calculation and correct it if necessary.
70026 No other screens are stored in the internal screen
memory.
No other screens can be selected.
70027 The backup of the RAM file system has been
started.
70028 The files from the RAM have been copied in the
Flash memory.
The files from the RAM have been copied in the
Flash memory. Following a restart, these saved
files are copied back to the RAM file system.
70029 Backup of the RAM file system has failed.
No backup copy of the RAM file system has been
made.
Check the settings in the "Control Panel > OP" dialog and
save the RAM file system using the "Save Files" button in
the "Persistent Storage" tab.
70030 The parameters configured for the system function
are faulty.
The connection to the new controller was not
established.
Compare the parameters configured for the system
function with the parameters configured for the controllers
and correct them as necessary.
70031 The controller configured in the system function is
not an S7 controller.
The connection to the new controller was not
established.
Compare the S7 controller name parameter configured
for the system function with the parameters configured for
the controller and correct them as necessary.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
A-20 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Number Effect/cause Remedy
70032 The object configured with this number in the tab
order is not available in the selected screen.
The screen changes but the focus is set to the first
object.
Check the number of the tab order and correct it if
necessary.
70033 An e-mail cannot be sent because a TCP/IP
connection to the SMTP server no longer exists.
This system alarm is generated only at the first
attempt. All subsequent unsuccessful attempts to
send an e-mail will no longer generate a system
alarm. The event is regenerated when an e-mail
has been successfully sent in the meantime.
The central e-mail component in WinCC flexible
Runtime attempts, in regular intervals (1 minute), to
establish the connection to the SMTP server and to
send the remaining e-mails.
Check the network connection to the SMTP server and
re-establish it if necessary.
70034 Following a disruption, the TCP/IP connection to
the SMTP server could be re-established.
The queued e-mails are then sent.
70036 No SMTP server for sending e-mails is configured.
An attempt to connect to an SMTP server has failed
and it is not possible to send e-mails.
WinCC flexible Runtime generates the system
alarm after the first attempt to send an e-mail.
Configure an SMTP server:
In WinCC flexible Engineering System
using "Device settings > Device settings"
In the Windows CE operating system
using "Control Panel > Internet Settings > E-mail > SMTP
Server"
70037 An e-mail cannot be sent for unknown reasons.
The contents of the e-mail are lost.
Check the e-mail parameters (recipient etc.).
70038 The SMTP server has rejected sending or
forwarding an e-mail because the domain of the
recipient is unknown to the server or because the
SMTP server requires authentication.
The contents of the e-mail are lost.
Check the domain of the recipient address or deactivate
the authentication on the SMTP server if possible. SMTP
authentication is currently not used in WinCC flexible
Runtime.
70039 The syntax of the e-mail address is incorrect or
contains illegal characters.
The contents of the e-mail are discarded.
Check the e-mail address of the recipient.
70040 The syntax of the e-mail address is incorrect or
contains illegal characters.
70041 The import of the user management was aborted
due to an error.
Nothing was imported.
Check your user management or transfer it again to the
panel.
80001 The log specified is filled to the size defined (in
percent) and must be stored elsewhere.
Store the file or table by executing a ‘move’ or ‘copy’
function.
80002 A line is missing in the specified log.
80003 The copying process for logging was not
successful.
In this case, it is advisable to check any
subsequent system alarms, too.
80006 Since logging is not possible, this causes a
permanent loss of the functionality.
In the case of databases, check if the corresponding data
source exists and start up the system again.
80009 A copying action has been completed successfully.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 A-21
Number Effect/cause Remedy
80010 Since the storage location was incorrectly entered
in WinCC flexible, this causes a permanent loss of
the functionality.
Configure the storage location for the respective log
again and restart the system when the full functionality is
required.
80012 Log entries are stored in a buffer. If the values are
read to the buffer faster than they can be physically
written (using a hard disk, for example),
overloading may occur and recording is then
stopped.
Archive fewer values.
Or:
Increase the logging cycle.
80013 The overload status no longer applies. Archiving
resumes the recording of all values.
80014 The same action was triggered twice in quick
succession. Since the process is already in
operation, the action is only carried out once.
80015 This system alarm is used to report DOS or
database errors to the user.
80016 The logs are separated by the system function
"CloseAllLogs" and the incoming entries exceed the
defined buffer size.
All entries in the buffer are deleted.
Reconnect the logs.
80017 The number of incoming events cause a buffer
overflow. his can be caused, for example, by
several copying actions being activated at the same
time.
All copy jobs are deleted.
Stop the copy action.
80019 The connection between WinCC flexible and all
logs were closed, for example, after executing the
system function "CloseAllLogs".
Entries are written to the buffer and are then written
to the logs when a connection is re-established.
There is no connection to the storage location and
the storage medium may be replaced, for example.
80020 The maximum number of simultaneously copy
operations has been exceeded. Copying is not
executed.
Wait until the current copying actions have been
completed, then restart the last copy action.
80021 An attempt was made to delete a log which is still
busy with a copy action. Deletion has not been
executed.
Wait until the current copying actions have been
completed, then restart the last action
80022 An attempt was made to start a sequence log,
which is not a sequence log, from a log using the
system function "StartSequenceLog". No sequence
log file is created.
In the project, check
if the "StartSequenceLog" system function was
properly configured
if the tag parameters are properly provided with data
on the HMI device
80023 An attempt was made to copy a log to itself.
The log is not copied.
In the project, check
if the "CopyLog" system function was properly
configured
if the tag parameters are properly provided with data
on the HMI device
80024 The "CopyLog" system function does not allow
copying when the target log already contains data
("Mode" parameter). The log is not copied.
Edit the "CopyLog" system function in the project if
necessary. Before you initiate the system function, delete
the destination log file.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
A-22 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Number Effect/cause Remedy
80025 You have canceled the copy operation.
Data written up to this point are retained. The
destination log file (if configured) is not deleted.
The cancellation is reported by an error entry
$RT_ERR$ at the end of the destination log.
80026 This alarm is output after all logs are initialized.
Values are written to the logs from then on. Prior to
this, no entries are written to the logs, irrespective
whether WinCC flexible Runtime is active or not.
80027 The internal Flash memory has been specified as
the storage location for a log. This is not
permissible.
No values are written to this log and the log file is
not created.
Configure "Storage Card" or a network path as the
storage location.
80028 The alarm returns a status report indicating that the
logs are currently being initialized. No values are
logged until the alarm 80026 is output.
80029 The number of logs specified in the alarm could not
be initialized. The logs are initialized.
The faulty log files are not available for logging
jobs.
Evaluate the additional system alarms , related to this
alarm which is also generated.
Check the configuration, the ODBC (Open Database
Connectivity) and the specified drive.
80030 The structure of the existing log file does not match
the expected structure.
Logging is stopped for this log.
Delete the existing log data manually, in advance.
80031 The log in CSV format is corrupted.
The log cannot be used.
Delete the faulty file.
80032 Logs can be assigned events. These are triggered
as soon as the log is full. If WinCC flexible Runtime
is started and the log is already full, the event is not
triggered.
The log specified no longer logs data because it is
full.
Close WinCC flexible Runtime, delete the log, then restart
WinCC flexible Runtime.
Or:
Configure a button which contains the same actions as
the event and press it.
80033 "System Defined" is set in the data log file as the
data source name. This causes an error. No data is
written to the database logs, whereas the logging to
the CSV logs works.
Install MSDE again.
80034 An error has occurred in the initialization of the
logs. An attempt has been made to create the
tables as a backup. This action was successful. A
backup has been made of the tables of the
corrupted log file and the cleared log was restarted.
No action is necessary. However, it is recommended to
save the backup files or delete them in order to make the
space available again.
80035 An error has occurred in the initialization of the
logs. An attempt has been made to create backups
of the tables and this has failed. No logging or
backup has been performed.
It is recommended to save the backups or to delete them
in order to release memory.
80044 The export of a log was interrupted because
Runtime was closed or due to a power failure. It
was detected that the export needed to be resume
when Runtime restarted.
The export resumes automatically.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 A-23
Number Effect/cause Remedy
80045 The export of a log was interrupted due to an error
in the connection to the server or at the server
itself.
The export is repeated automatically. Check:
the connection to the server
if the server is running
if there is enough free space on the server.
80046 The destination file could not be written while
exporting the log.
Check if there is enough space on the server and it you
have permission to create the log file.
80047 The log could not be read while exporting it. Check if the storage medium is correctly inserted.
80048
80049 The log could not be renamed while preparing to
export it.
The job can not be completed."
Check if the storage medium is correctly inserted and if
there is sufficient space on the medium.
80050 The log which shall be exported is not closed.
The job can not be completed.
Make sure the "CloseAll Logs" system function is called
before using the "ExportLog" system function. Change
the configuration as required.
90024 No operator actions can be logged due to lack of
space on the storage medium for log. The operator
action will therefore not be executed.
Make more space available by inserting an empty storage
medium or swapping out the log files on the server using
"ExportLog".
90025 Because of error state of the archive no user
actions can be logged. Therefore the user action
will not be executed.
Check if the storage medium is correctly inserted.
90026 No operator actions can be logged because the log
is closed. The operator action will therefore not be
executed.
Before further operator actions are carried out, the log
must be opened again using the system function
"OpenAllLogs". Change the configuration as required.
90029 Runtime was closed during ongoing operation
(perhaps due to a power failure) or an a storage
medium in use is incompatible with Audit Trail. An
Audit Trail is not suitable if it belongs to another
project or has already be archived.
Ensure that you are using the correct storage medium.
90030 Runtime was closed during ongoing operation
(perhaps due to a power failure).
90031 Runtime was closed during ongoing operation
(perhaps due to a power failure).
90032 Running out of space on the storage medium for
log.
Make more space available by inserting an empty storage
medium or swapping out the log files on the server using
"ExportLog".
90033 No more space on the storage medium for log. As
of now, no more operator actions requiring logging
will be executed.
Make more space available by inserting an empty storage
medium or swapping out the log files on the server using
"ExportLog".
90040 Audit Trail is switched off because of a forced user
action.
Activate the "Audit Trail" again using the system function
"StartLog".
90041 A user action which has to be logged has been
executed without a logged on user.
A user action requiring logging should only be possible
with permission. Change the configuration by setting a
required permission for the input object.
90044 A user action which has to be confirmed was
blocked, because there is another user action
pending.
Repeat the user action if necessary.
110000 The operating mode was changed. "Offline" mode
is now set.
110001 The operating mode was changed. "Online" mode
is now set.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
A-24 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Number Effect/cause Remedy
110002 The operating mode was not changed. Check the connection to the controllers.
Check if the address area for the area pointer 88
“Coordination" in the controller is available.
110003 The operating mode of the specified controller was
changed by the system function
"SetConnectionMode".
The operating mode is now "offline".
110004 The operating mode of the specified controller has
been changed by the system function
"SetConnectionMode".
The operating mode is now "online".
110005 An attempt was made to use the system function
SetConnectionMode to switch the specified
controller to "online" mode, although the entire
system is in "offline" mode. This changeover is not
allowed. The controller remains in "offline" mode.
Switch the complete system to "online" mode, then
execute the system function again.
110006 The content of the "project version" area pointer
does not match the user version configured in
WinCC flexible. WinCC flexible Runtime is
therefore closed.
Check:
the project version entered on the controller
the project version entered in WinCC flexible
120000 The trend is not displayed because you configured
an incorrect axis to the trend or an incorrect trend.
Change the configuration.
120001 The trend is not displayed because you configured
an incorrect axis to the trend or an incorrect trend.
Change the configuration.
120002 The trend is not displayed because the tag
assigned attempts to access an invalid controller
address.
Check if the data area for the tag exists in the controller,
the configured address is correct and the value range for
the tag is correct.
130000 The action was not executed. Close all other programs.
Delete files no longer required from the hard disk.
130001 The action was not executed. Delete files no longer required from the hard disk.
130002 The action was not executed. Close all other programs.
Delete files no longer required from the hard disk.
130003 No data medium found. The operation is canceled. Check, for example, if
the correct data medium is being accessed
the data medium is inserted
130004 The data medium is write-protected. The operation
is canceled.
Check if access has been made to the correct data
carrier. Remove the write protection.
130005 The file is read only. The operation is canceled. Check if access has been made to the correct file. Edit
the file attributes if necessary.
130006 Access to file failed. The operation is canceled. Check, for example, if
the correct file is being accessed
the file exists
another action is preventing simultaneous access to
the file
130007 The network connection is interrupted.
Data records cannot be saved or read over the
network connection.
Check the network connection and eliminate the cause of
error.
130008 The storage card is not available.
Data records cannot be saved to / read from the
storage card.
Insert the storage card.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 A-25
Number Effect/cause Remedy
130009 The specified folder does not exist on the storage
card.
Any files saved to this directory are not backed up
when you switch off the HMI device.
Insert the storage card.
130010 The maximum nesting depth can be exhausted
when, for example, a value change in a script
results in the call of another script and the second
script in turn has a value change that results in the
call of yet a further script etc.
The configured functionality is not supported.
Check the configuration.
140000 An online connection to the controller is
established.
140001 The online connection to the controller was shut
down.
140003 No tag updating or writing is executed. Check the connection and if the controller is switched on.
Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel
using "Set PG/PC interface".
Restart the system.
140004 No tag update or write operations are executed
because the access point or the module
configuration is faulty.
Verify the connection and check if the controller is
switched on.
Check the access point or the module configuration (MPI,
PPI, PROFIBUS) in the Control Panel with "Set PG/PC
interface".
Restart the system.
140005 No tag updating or writing is executed because the
HMI device address is incorrect (possibly too high).
Use a different HMI device address.
Verify the connection and check ifthe controller is
switched on.
Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel
using "Set PG/PC interface".
Restart the system.
140006 No tag updating or writing is executed because the
baud rate is incorrect.
Select a different baud rate in WinCC flexible (according
to module, profile, communication peer, etc.).
140007 Tag are not updated or written because the bus
profile is incorrect (see %1).
The following parameter could not be written to the
registry::
1: Tslot
2: Tqui
3: Tset
4: MinTsdr
5: MaxTsdr
6: Trdy
7: Tid1
8: Tid2
9: Gap Factor
10: Retry Limit
Check the user-defined bus profile.
Check the connection and if the controller is switched on.
Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel
using "Set PG/PC interface".
Restart the system.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
A-26 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Number Effect/cause Remedy
140008 No tag updating or writing is executed because
baud rate is incorrect. The following parameters
could not be written to the registry:
0: General error
1: Wrong version
2: Profile cannot be written to the registry.
3: The subnet type cannot be written to the
registry.
4: The Target Rotation Time cannot be written to
the registry.
5: Faulty Highest Address (HSA).
Check the connection and if the controller is switched on.
Check the parameter definitions in the Control Panel
using "Set PG/PC interface".
Restart the system.
140009 Tags are not updated or written because the
module for S7 communication was not found.
Reinstall the module in the Control Panel using "Set
PG/PC interface".
140010 No S7 communication partner found because the
controller is shut down.
DP/T:
The option “PG/PC is the only master” is not set in
the Control Panel under “Set PG/PC interface.”
Switch the controller on.
DP/T:
If only one master is connected to the network, disable
"PG/PC is the only master" in "Set PG/PC interface".
If several masters are connected to the network, enable
these. Do not change any settings, for this will cause bus
errors.
140011 No tag updating or writing is executed because
communication is down.
Check the connection and that the communication
partner is switched on.
140012 There is an initialization problem (e.g. when WinCC
flexible Runtime was closed in Task Manager).
Or:
Another application (e.g.STEP7) with different bus
parameters is active and the driver cannot be
started with the new bus parameters (transmission
rate, for example).
Restart the HMI device.
Or:
Run WinCC flexible Runtime, then start your other
applications.
140013 The MPI cable is disconnected and, thus, there is
no power supply.
Check the connections.
140014 The configured bus address is in already in use by
another application.
Edit the HMI device address in the controller
configuration.
140015 Wrong transmission rate
Or:
Faulty bus parameters (e.g.HSA)
Or:
OP address > HSA or: Wrong interrupt vector
(interrupt does not arrive at the driver)
Correct the relevant parameters.
140016 The hardware does not support the configured
interrupt.
Change the interrupt number.
140017 The set interrupt is in use by another driver. Change the interrupt number.
140018 The consistency check was disabled by SIMOTION
Scout. Only a corresponding note appears.
Enable the consistency check with SIMOTION Scout and
once again download the project to the PLC.
140019 SIMOTION Scout is downloading a new project to
the controller. Connection to the controller is
canceled.
Wait until the end of the reconfiguration.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 A-27
Number Effect/cause Remedy
140020 The version in the controller and that of the project
(FWX file) do not match.
Connection to the controller is canceled
The following remedies are available:
Download the current version to the PLC using
SIMOTION Scout.
Regenerate the project using WinCC flexible ES, close
WinCC flexible Runtime and restart with a new
configuration.
150000 No more data is read or written. Possible causes:
The cable is defective.
The PLC does not respond, is defective, etc.
The wrong port is used for the connection.
System overload.
Ensure that the cable is plugged in, the controller is
operational, the correct interface is being used.
Restart the system if the system alarm persists.
150001 Connection is up because the cause of the
interruption has been eliminated.
160000 No more data is read or written. Possible causes:
The cable is defective.
The PLC does not respond, is defective, etc.
The wrong port is used for the connection.
System overload.
Ensure that the cable is plugged in, the controller is
operational, the correct interface is being used.
Restart the system if the system alarm persists.
160001 Connection is up because the cause of the
interruption has been eliminated.
160010 No connection to the server because the server
identification (CLS-ID) cannot be determined.
Values cannot be read or written.
Check access rights.
160011 No connection to the server because the server
identification (CLS-ID) cannot be determined.
Values cannot be read or written.
Check, for example, if
the server name is correct
the computer name is correct
the server is registered
160012 No connection to the server because the server
identification (CLS-ID) cannot be determined.
Values cannot be read or written.
Check, for example, if
the server name is correct
the computer name is correct
the server is registered
Note for advanced users:
Interpret the value from HRESULT.
160013 The specified server was started as InProc server.
This has not been released and may possibly lead
to incorrect behavior because the server is running
in the same process area as the WinCC flexible
Runtime software.
Configure the server as OutProc Server or Local Server.
160014 Only one OPC server project can be started on a
PC/MP. An alarm is output when an attempt is
made to start a second project.
The second project has no OPC server functionality
and cannot be located as an OPC server by
external sources.
Do not start a second project with OPC server
functionality on the computer.
170000 S7 diagnostics events are not indicated because it
is not possible to log in to the S7 diagnostics
functions at this device. The service is not
supported.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
A-28 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Number Effect/cause Remedy
170001 The S7 diagnostics buffer cannot be viewed
because communication with the controller is shut
down.
Set the controller to online mode.
170002 The S7 diagnostics buffer cannot be viewed
because reading of the diagnostics buffer (SSL)
was canceled with error.
170003 An S7 diagnostics event cannot be visualized. The
system returns internal error %2.
170004 An S7 diagnostics event cannot be visualized. The
system returns an internal error of error class %2,
error number %3.
170007 It is not possible to read the S7 diagnostics buffer
(SSL) because this operation was canceled with an
internal error of class %2 and error code %3.
180000 A component/OCX received configuration data with
a version ID which is not supported.
Install a newer component.
180001 System overload because too many actions
running in parallel. Not all the actions can be
executed, some are rejected.
Several remedies are available:
Increase the configured cycle times or basic clock.
Generate the alarms at a slower rate (polling).
Initiate scripts and functions at greater intervals.
If the alarm appears more frequently:
Restart the HMI device.
180002 The on-screen keyboard could not be activated.
Possible causes:
"TouchInputPC.exe" was not registered due to a
faulty Setup.
Reinstall WinCC flexible Runtime.
190000 It is possible that the tag is not updated.
190001 The tag is updated after the cause of the last error
state has been eliminated (return to normal
operation).
190002 The tag is not updated because communication
with the controller is down.
Select the system function "SetOnline" to go online.
190004 The tag is not updated because the configured tag
address does not exist.
Check the configuration.
190005 The tag is not updated because the configured
controller type does not exist for this tag.
Check the configuration.
190006 The tag is not updated because it is not possible to
map the controller type in the data type of the tag.
Check the configuration.
190007 The tag value is not modified because the
connection to the controller is interrupted or the tag
is offline.
Set online mode or reconnect to the controller.
190008 The threshold values configured for the tag have
been violated, for example, by
a value entered
a system function
a script
Observe the configured or current threshold values of the
tag.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 A-29
Number Effect/cause Remedy
190009 An attempt has been made to assign the tag a
value which is outside the permitted range of
values for this data type.
For example, a value of 260 was entered for a byte
tag or a value of -3 for an unsigned word tag.
Observe the range of values for the data type of the tags.
190010 Too many values are written to the tag (for
example, in a loop triggered by a script).
Values are lost because only up to 100 actions are
saved to the buffer.
Increase the time interval between multiple write actions.
190011 Possible cause 1:
The value entered could not be written to the
configured controller tag because the high or low
limit was exceeded.
The system discards the entry and restores the
original value.
Possible cause 2:
The connection to the controller was interrupted.
Make sure that the value entered lies within the range of
values of the control tags.
Check the connection to the PLC.
190012 It is not possible to convert a value from a source
format to a target format, for example:
An attempt is being made to assign a value to a
counter that is outside the valid, PLC-specific value
range.
A tag of the type Integer should be assigned a
value of the type String.
Check the range of values or the data type of the tags.
190100 The area pointer is not updated because the
address configured for this pointer does not exist.
Type
1 Warning alarms
2 Error alarms
3 Controller acknowledgment
4 HMI device acknowledgment
5 LED mapping
6 Trend request
7 Trend transfer 1
8 Trend transfer 2
No.:
consecutive number shown in WinCC flexible ES.
Check the configuration.
190101 The area pointer is not updated because it is not
possible to map the PLC type to the area pointer
type.
Parameter type and no.:
see alarm 190100
190102 The area pointer is updated after the cause of the
last error state has been eliminated (return to
normal operation). Parameter type and no.: See
alarm 190100.
200000 Coordination is not executed because the address
configured in the controller does not exist/is not set.
Change the address or set up the address in the
controller.
200001 Coordination is canceled because the write access
to the address configured in the PLC is not
possible.
Change the address or set the address in the controller at
an area which allows write access.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
A-30 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Number Effect/cause Remedy
200002 Coordination is not carried out at the moment
because the address format of the area pointer
does not match the internal storage format.
Internal error
200003 Coordination can be executed again because the
last error state is eliminated (return to normal
operation).
200004 The coordination may not be executed.
200005 No more data is read or written. Possible causes:
The cable is defective.
The PLC does not respond, is defective, etc.
System overload.
Ensure that the cable is plugged in and the controller is
operational.
Restart the system if the system alarm persists.
200100 Coordination is not executed because the address
configured in the controller does not exist/is not set.
Change the address or set up the address in the
controller.
200101 Coordination is canceled because the write access
to the address configured in the PLC is not
possible.
Change the address or set the address in the controller at
an area which allows write access.
200102 Coordination is not carried out at the moment
because the address format of the area pointer
does not match the internal storage format.
Internal error
200103 Coordination can be executed again because the
last error state is eliminated (return to normal
operation).
200104 The coordination may not be executed.
200105 No more data is read or written. Possible causes:
The cable is defective.
The PLC does not respond, is defective, etc.
System overload.
Ensure that the cable is plugged in and the controller is
operational.
Restart the system if the system alarm persists.
210000 Jobs are not processed because the address
configured in the controller does not exist/has not
been set up.
Change the address or set up the address in the
controller.
210001 Jobs are not processed because read/write access
to the address configured in the controller is not
possible.
Change the address or set up the address in the
controller in an area which allows read/write access.
210002 Jobs are not executed because the address format
of the area pointer does not match the internal
storage format.
Internal error
210003 The job buffer is processed again because the last
error status has been eliminated (return to normal
operation).
210004 It is possible that the job buffer will not be
processed.
210005 A control request with an illegal number was
initiated.
Check the controller program.
210006 An error occurred while attempting to execute the
control request. As a result, the control request is
not executed. Observe the next/previous system
alarms.
Check the parameters of the control request. Recompile
the configuration.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 A-31
Number Effect/cause Remedy
220001 The tag is not downloaded because the associated
communication driver / HMI device does not
support the download of Boolean/discrete data
types.
Change the configuration.
220002 The tag is not downloaded because the associated
communication driver / HMI device does not
support write access to the data type BYTE.
Change the configuration.
220003 The communication driver cannot be loaded. The
driver may not be installed.
Install the driver by reinstalling WinCC flexible Runtime.
220004 Communication is down and no update data is
transferred because the cable is not connected or
defective etc.
Check the connection.
220005 Communication is up.
220006 The connection between the specified PLC and the
specified port is active.
220007 The connection to the specified controller is
interrupted at the specified port.
Check if
the cable is plugged in
the controller is OK
the correct port is used
your configuration is OK (interface parameters,
protocol settings, PLC address).
Restart the system if the system alarm persists.
220008 The communication driver cannot access or open
the specified port. The port may be in use by
another application or the port used is not available
on the destination device.
There is no communication with the controller.
Close all the applications which access this port and
restart the computer.
Use another port of the system.
230000 The value entered could not be accepted. The
system discards the entry and restores the previous
value.
Either
the value range has been exceeded
illegal characters have been entered
the maximum permitted number of users has
been exceeded
Enter a practical value or delete any unneeded users.
230002 The currently logged in user is not granted write
access rights. The system therefore discards the
input and restored the previous value.
Log on as a user with appropriate rights.
230003 Changeover to the specified screen failed because
the screen is not available/configured. The current
screen remains selected.
Configure the screen and check the screen selection
function.
230005 The value range of the tag has been exceeded in
the IO field.
The original value of the tag is retained.
Observe the range of values for the tag when entering a
value.
230100 During navigation in the web browser, the system
returned a message which may be of interest to the
user.
The web browser continues to run but may not
(fully) show the new page.
Navigate to another page.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
A-32 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Number Effect/cause Remedy
230200 The connection to the HTTP channel was
interrupted due to an error. This error is explained
in detail by another system alarm.
Data is no longer exchanged.
Check the network connection.
Check the server configuration.
230201 The connection to HTTP channel was established.
Data is exchanged.
230202 WININET.DLL has detected an error. This error
usually occurs when an attempt to connect to the
server fails or the server refuses to connect
because the client lacks the proper authorization.
An unknown server certificate may also be the
cause if the connection is encrypted by means of
SSL.
The alarm text provides details.
This text is always in the language of the Windows
installation because it is returned by the Windows
OS.
Process values are no longer exchanged.
Depending on the cause:
When an attempt to connect fails or a timeout error
occurs:
Check the network connection and the network.
Check the server address.
Check if the web server is actually running on the
destination computer.
Faulty authorization:
The configured user name and/or password do not
match those on the server. Establish consistency.
When the server certificate is rejected:
Certificate signed by an unknown CA ( ):
Either ignore this item in your project, or
Install a certificate that has been signed with a root
certificate known to the client computer.
The date of the certificate is invalid:
Either ignore this item in your project, or
Install a certificate with a valid date on the server.
Invalid CN (Common Name or Computer Name):
Either ignore this item in your project, or
Install a certificate with a name that corresponds to
that of the server address.
230203 Although a connection can be made to the server,
the HTTP server refuses to connect because
WinCC flexible Runtime is not running on the
server, or
the HTTP channel is not supported (503
Service unavailable).
Other errors can only occur if the web server does
not support the HTTP channel. The language of the
alarm text depends on the web server.
Data is not exchanged.
Error 503 Service unavailable: Check if
WinCC flexible Runtime is running on the server
the HTTP channel is supported.
230301 An internal error has occurred. An English text
explains the error in more detail. This may be
caused by insufficient memory.
OCX does not work.
230302 The name of the remote server cannot be resolved.
The attempt to connect failed.
Check the configured server address.
Check if the DNS service is available on the network.
230303 The remote server is not running on the addressed
computer.
Wrong server address.
The attempt to connect failed
Check the configured server address.
Check if the remote server is running on the target
computer.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 A-33
Number Effect/cause Remedy
230304 The remote server on the addressed computer is
incompatible to VNCOCX.
The attempt to connect failed.
Use a compatible remote server.
230305 The authentication has failed because the
password is incorrect.
The attempt to connect failed.
Configure the correct password.
230306 Error in the connection to the remote server. This
may occur as a result of network problems.
The attempt to connect failed.
Check if
the bus cable is plugged in
there are network problems
230307 The connection to the remote server was shut
down because
the remote server was shut down, or
the user instructed the server to close all
connections.
The connection is closed.
230308 This alarm provides information on the connection
status.
An attempt is made to connect.
240000 WinCC flexible Runtime is operating in demo mode.
You have no authorization or your authorization is
corrupted.
Install the authorization.
240001 WinCC flexible Runtime is operating in demo mode.
Too many tags are configured for the installed
version.
Load an adequate authorization / powerpack.
240002 WinCC flexible Runtime is operating with a time-
limited emergency authorization.
Restore the full authorization.
240003 Authorization failed.
Without authorization, WinCC will run in demo
mode.
Restart WinCC flexible Runtime or reinstall it.
240004 Error while reading the emergency authorization.
WinCC flexible Runtime is operating in demo mode.
Restart WinCC flexible Runtime, install the authorization
or repair the authorization (see Commissioning
Instructions Software Protection).
240005 The Automation License Manager has detected an
internal system fault.
Possible causes:
A corrupt file
A defective installation
No free space for the Automation License
Manager etc.
Reboot the HMI device or PC. If this does not solve the
problem, remove the Automation License Manager and
install it again.
250000 The tag in the specified line in "Status force" is not
updated because the address configured for this
tag is not available.
Check the set address and then verify that the address is
set up in the controller.
250001 The tag in the specified line in "Status force" is not
updated because the controller type configured for
this tag does not exist.
Check the set address.
250002 The tag in the specified line in "Status force" is not
updated because it is not possible to map the
controller type in the tag type.
Check the set address.
250003 An attempt to connect to the PLC failed. The tags
are not updated.
Check the connection to the PLC. Check that the
controller is switched on and is online.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
A-34 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Number Effect/cause Remedy
260000 An unknown user or an unknown password has
been entered in the system.
The current user is logged off from the system.
Log on to the system as a user with a valid password.
260001 The logged in user does not have sufficient
authorization to execute the protected functions on
the system.
Log on to the system as a user with sufficient
authorization.
260002 This alarm is triggered by the system function
"TrackUserChange".
260003 The user has logged off from the system.
260004 The user name entered into the user view already
exists in the user management.
Select another user name because user names have to
be unique in the user management.
260005 The entry is discarded. Use a shorter user name.
260006 The entry is discarded. Use a shorter or longer password.
260007 The logon timeout value entered is outside the valid
range of 0 to 60 minutes.
The new value is discarded and the original value is
retained.
Enter a logon timeout value between 0 and 60 minutes.
260008 An attempt was made to read a PTProRun.pwl file
created with ProTool V 6.0 in WinCC flexible.
Reading the file was canceled due to incompatibility
of the format.
260009 You have attempted to delete the user "Admin" or
"PLC User". These users are fixed components of
the user management and cannot be deleted.
If you need to delete a user, because perhaps you have
exceeded the maximum number permitted, delete
another user.
260012 The passwords entered in the "Change Password"
dialog and the confirmation field are not identical.
The password has not been changed. User will be
logged off.
You have to log on to the system again. Then enter the
identical password twice to be able to change the
password.
260013 The password entered in the "Change Password"
dialog is invalid because it is already in use.
The password has not been changed. User will be
logged off.
You have to log on to the system again. Then enter a
new password that has not been used before.
260014 User has unsuccessfully attempted to log on 3
times in succession.
The user has been locked out and assigned to
group no. 0.
You can log on to the system with your correct password.
Only an administrator can change the assignment to a
group.
270000 A tag is not indicated in the alarm because it
attempts to access an invalid address in the
controller.
Check if the data area for the tag exists in the controller,
the configured address is correct and the value range for
the tag is correct.
270001 There is a device-specific limit as to how many
alarms may be queued for output (see the
operating instructions). This limit has been
exceeded.
The view no longer contains all the alarms.
However, all alarms are written to the alarm buffer.
270002 The view shows alarms of a log for which there is
no data in the current project.
Wildcards are output for the alarms.
Delete older log data if necessary.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 A-35
Number Effect/cause Remedy
270003 The service cannot be set up because too many
devices want to use this service.
A maximum of four devices may execute this
action.
Reduce the number of HMI devices which want to use the
service.
270004 Access to persistent buffer is not possible. Alarms
cannot be restored or saved.
If the problems persist at the next startup, contact
Customer Support (delete Flash).
270005 Persistent buffer damaged: Alarms cannot be
restored.
If the problems persist at the next startup, contact
Customer Support (delete Flash).
270006 Project modified: Alarms cannot be restored from
the persistent buffer.
The project was generated and transferred new to the
HMI device; The error should no longer occur when the
device starts again.
270007 A configuration problem is preventing the restore (a
DLL is missing, a directory is unknown, etc.).
Update the operating system and then transfer your
project again to the HMI device.
280000 Connection is up because the cause of the
interruption has been eliminated.
280001 No more data is read or written. Possible causes:
The cable is defective.
The PLC does not respond, is defective, etc.
The wrong port is used for the connection.
System overload.
Check if
the cable is plugged in
the controller is OK
the correct port is used
Restart the system if the system alarm persists.
280002 The connection used requires a function block in
the controller.
The function block has responded. Communication
is now enabled.
280003 The connection used requires a function block in
the controller.
The function block has not responded.
Check if
the cable is plugged in
the controller is OK
the correct port is used
Restart the system if the system alarm persists.
Remedy depends on the error code:
1: The function block must set the COM bit in the
response container.
2: The function block must not set the ERROR bit in the
response container.
3: The function block must respond within the specified
time (timeout).
4: Go online to the PLC.
280004 The connection to the controller is interrupted.
There is no data exchange at present.
Check the connection parameters in WinCC flexible.
Ensure that the cable is plugged in, the controller is
operational, the correct interface is being used.
Restart the system if the system alarm persists.
290000 The recipe tag could not be read or written. It is
assigned the start value.
The alarm can be entered in the alarm buffer for up
to four more failed tags if necessary. After that,
alarm 290003 is output.
Check in the configuration that the address has been set
up in the controller.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
A-36 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Number Effect/cause Remedy
290001 An attempt has been made to assign a value to a
recipe tag which is outside the value range
permitted for this type.
The alarm can be entered in the alarm buffer for up
to four more failed tags if necessary. After that,
alarm 290004 is output.
Observe the value range for the tag type.
290002 It is not possible to convert a value from a source
format to a target format.
The alarm can be entered in the alarm buffer for up
to four more failed recipe tags if necessary. After
that, alarm 290005 is output.
Check the value range or type of the tag.
290003 This alarm is output when alarm number 290000 is
triggered more than five times.
In this case, no further separate alarms are
generated.
Check in the configuration that the tag addresses have
been set up in the controller.
290004 This alarm is output when alarm number 290001 is
triggered more than five times.
In this case, no further separate alarms are
generated.
Observe the value range for the tag type.
290005 This alarm is output when alarm number 290002 is
triggered more than five times.
In this case, no further separate alarms are
generated.
Check the value range or type of the tag.
290006 The threshold values configured for the tag have
been violated by values entered.
Observe the configured or current threshold values of the
tag.
290007 There is a difference between the source and target
structure of the recipe currently being processed.
The target structure contains an additional data
recipe tag which is not available in the source
structure.
The data recipe tag specified is assigned its start
value.
Insert the specified data recipe tag in the source
structure.
290008 There is a difference between the source and target
structure of the recipe currently being processed.
The source structure contains an additional data
recipe tag which is not available in the target
structure and therefore cannot be assigned.
The value is rejected.
Remove the specified data recipe tag in the specified
recipe from the project.
290010 The storage location configured for the recipe is not
permitted.
Possible causes:
Illegal characters, write protection, data carrier out
of space or does not exist.
Check the configured storage location.
290011 The data record with the specified number does not
exist.
Check the source for the number (constant or tag value).
290012 The recipe with the specified number does not
exist.
Check the source for the number (constant or tag value).
290013 An attempt was made to save a data record under
a data record number which already exists.
The action is not executed.
The following remedies are available:
Check the source for the number (constant or tag
value).
First, delete the data record.
Change the "Overwrite" function parameter.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 A-37
Number Effect/cause Remedy
290014 The file specified to be imported could not be
found.
Check:
The file name
Ensure that the file is in the specified directory.
290020 Message reporting that the download of data
records from the HMI device to the PLC has
started.
290021 Message reporting that the download of data
records from the HMI device to the PLC was
completed.
290022 Message reporting that the download of data
records from the HMI device to the PLC was
canceled due to an error.
Check in the configuration whether:
The tag addresses are configured in the controller
The recipe number exists
The data record number exist
The "Overwrite" function parameter is set
290023 Message reporting that the download of data
records from the PLC to the HMI device has
started.
290024 Message reporting that the download of data
records from the PLC to the HMI device was
completed.
290025 Message reporting that the download of data
records from the PLC to the HMI device was
canceled due to an error.
Check in the configuration whether:
The tag addresses are configured in the controller
The recipe number exists
The data record number exist
The "Overwrite" function parameter is set
290026 An attempt has been made to read/write a data
record although the data record is not free at
present.
This error may occur in the case of recipes for
which downloading with synchronization has been
configured.
Set the data record status to zero.
290027 Unable to connect to the controller at present. As a
result, the data record can neither be read nor
written.
Possible causes:
No physical connection to the controller (no cable
plugged in, cable is defect) or the controller is
switched off.
Check the connection to the PLC.
290030 This alarm is output after you selected screen
which contains a recipe view in which a data record
is already selected.
Reload the data record from the storage location or retain
the current values.
290031 While saving, it was detected that a data record
with the specified number already exists.
Overwrite the data record or cancel the action.
290032 While exporting data records it was detected that a
file with the specified name already exists.
Overwrite the file or cancel the process.
290033 Confirmation request before deleting data records.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
A-38 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Number Effect/cause Remedy
290040 A data record error with error code %1 that cannot
be described in more detail occurred.
The action is canceled.
It is possible that the data record was not installed
correctly on the controller.
Check the storage location, the data record, the "Data
record" area pointer and if necessary, the connection to
the controller.
Restart the action after a short time.
If the error persists, contact Customer Support. Forward
the relevant error code to Customer Support.
290041 A data record or file cannot be saved because the
storage location is full.
Delete files no longer required.
290042 An attempt was made to execute several recipe
actions simultaneously. The last action was not
executed.
Trigger the action again after waiting a short period.
290043 Confirmation request before storing data records.
290044 The data store for the recipe has been destroyed
and is deleted.
290050 Message reporting that the export of data records
has started.
290051 Message reporting that the export of data records
was completed.
290052 Message reporting that the export of data records
was canceled due to an error.
Ensure that the structure of the data records at the
storage location and the current recipe structure on the
HMI device are identical.
290053 Message reporting that the import of data records
has started.
290054 Message reporting that the import of data records
was completed.
290055 Message reporting that the import of data records
was canceled due to an error.
Ensure that the structure of the data records at the
storage location and the current recipe structure on the
HMI device are identical.
290056 Error when reading/writing the value in the
specified line/column.
The action was canceled.
Check the specified line/column.
290057 The tags of the recipe specified were toggled from
"offline" to "online" mode.
Each change of a tag in this recipe is now
immediately downloaded to the controller.
290058 The tags of the specified recipe were toggled from
"offline" to "online" mode.
Modifications to tags in this recipe are no longer
immediately transferred to the controller but must
be transferred there explicitly by downloading a
data record.
290059 Message reporting that the specified data record
was saved.
290060 Message reporting that the specified data record
memory was cleared.
290061 Message reporting that clearing of data record
memory was canceled due to an error.
290062 The data record number is above the maximum of
65536.
This data record cannot be created.
Select another number.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 A-39
Number Effect/cause Remedy
290063 This occurs with the system function
"ExportDataRecords" when the parameter
"Overwrite" is set to No.
An attempt has been made to save a recipe under
a file name which already exists.
The export is canceled.
Check the "ExportDataRecords" system function.
290064 Message reporting that the deletion of data records
has started.
290065 Message reporting that the deletion of data records
has successfully completed.
290066 Confirmation request before deleting data records.
290068 Security request to confirm if all data records in the
recipe should be deleted.
290069 Security request to confirm if all data records in the
recipe should be deleted.
290070 The data record specified is not in the import file. Check the source of the data record number or data
record name (constant or tag value).
290071 During the editing of data record values, a value
was entered which exceeded the low limit of the
recipe tag.
The entry is discarded.
Enter a value within the limits of the recipe tag.
290072 When editing data record values, a value was
entered which exceeds the high limit of the recipe
tag.
The entry is discarded.
Enter a value within the limits of the recipe tag.
290073 An action (e.g. saving a data record) failed due to
an unknown error.
The error corresponds to the status alarm
IDS_OUT_CMD_EXE_ERR in the large recipe
view.
290074 While saving, it was detected that a data record
with the specified number already exists but under
another name.
Overwrite the data record, change the data record
number or cancel the action.
290075 A data record with this name already exists.
The data record is not saved.
Please select a different data record name.
300000 Faulty configuration of process monitoring (e.g.
using PDiag or S7-Graph): More alarms are
queued than specified in the specifications of the
CPU. No further ALARM_S alarms can be
managed by the PLC and reported to the HMI
devices.
Change the controller configuration.
300001 ALARM_S is not registered on this controller. Select a controller that supports the ALARM_S service.
310000 An attempt is being made to print too many reports
in parallel.
Only one log file can be output to the printer at a
given time; the print job is therefore rejected.
Wait until the previous active log was printed.
Repeat the print job if necessary.
310001 An error occurred on triggering the printer. The
report is either not printed or printed with errors.
Evaluate the additional system alarms related to this
alarm.
Repeat the print job if necessary.
Appendix
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
A-40 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Number Effect/cause Remedy
320000 The movements have already been indicated by
another device.
The movements can no longer be controlled.
Deselect the movements on the other display units and
select the motion control screen on the required display
unit.
320001 The network is too complex.
The faulty addresses cannot be indicated.
View the network in STL.
320002 No diagnostics alarm selected.
The unit belonging to the alarm could not be
selected.
Select a diagnostics alarm from the ZP_ALARM alarm
screen.
320003 No alarms exists for the selected unit. The detail
view cannot visualize any networks.
Select the defective unit from the overview screen.
320004 The required signal states could not be read by the
PLC. The faulty addresses cannot be found.
Check the consistency between the configuration on the
display unit and the PLC program.
320005 The project contains ProAgent elements which are
not installed. ProAgent diagnostic functions cannot
be performed.
In order to run the project, install the optional ProAgent
package.
320006 You have attempted to execute a function which is
not supported in the current constellation.
Check the type of the selected unit.
320007 No error-triggering addresses were found on the
networks.
ProAgent cannot indicate any faulty addresses.
Switch the detail screen to STL layout mode and check
the status of the addresses and exclusion addresses.
320008 The diagnostic data stored in the configuration are
not synchronized with those in the PLC.
ProAgent can only indicate the diagnostic units.
Download the project to the HMI device again.
320009 The diagnostic data stored in the configuration are
not synchronized with those in the PLC. The
diagnostic screens can be operated as usual.
ProAgent may be unable to show all diagnostic
texts.
Download the project to the HMI device again.
320010 The diagnostic data stored in the configuration are
not synchronized with those in STEP7.
The ProAgent diagnostics data is not up-to-date.
Download the project to the HMI device again.
320011 A unit with the corresponding DB number and FB
number does not exist.
The function cannot be executed.
Check the parameters of the "SelectUnit" function and the
units selected in the project.
320012 The "Step sequence mode" dialog is no longer
supported.
Use the ZP_STEP step sequence screen from the
corresponding standard project for your project. Instead
of calling the Overview_Step_Sequence_Mode function,
call the "FixedScreenSelection" function using ZP_STEP
as the screen name.
320014 The selected controller cannot be evaluated for
ProAgent.
The Alarm view assigned to the
"EvaluateAlarmDisplayFault" system function could
not be found.
Check the parameters of the "EvaluateAlarmDisplayFault"
system function.
330022 Too many dialogs are open on the HMI device. Close all dialogs you do not require on the HMI device.
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 B-1
B Abbreviations B
CPU Central Processing Unit
CSV Comma Separated Values
CTS Clear To Send
DC Direct Current
DCD Data Carrier Detect
DIL Dual-in-Line (electronic chip housing design)
DP Distributed I/O
DSN Data Source Name
DSR Data Set Ready
DTR Data Terminal Ready
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EN European standard
ES Engineering System
ESD Electrostatic Discharge, the components and modules endangered by such
ESD Electrostatic Sensitive Device
GND Ground
HF High Frequency
HMI Human Machine Interface
IEC International Electronic Commission
IF Interface
LED Light Emitting Diode
MOS Metal Oxide Semiconductor
MPI Multipoint Interface (SIMATIC S7)
MS Microsoft
MTBF Mean Time Between Failures
n. c. Not connected
OP Operator Panel
PC/ Personal Computer
PG Programming device
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
PPI Point-to-Point Interface (SIMATIC S7)
RAM Random Access Memory
RJ45 Registered Jack Type 45
RTS Request To Send
RxD Receive Data
SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage
SP Service Pack
STN Super Twisted Nematic
Abbreviations
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
B-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Sub-D Subminiature D (plug)
TAB Tabulator
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TFT Thin Film Transistor
TxD Transmit Data
UL Underwriter’s Laboratory
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 Glossary-1
Glossary
"Transfer" mode
HMI device operating mode, set to transfer an executable project from the configuration
computer to the HMI device.
Acknowledge
Acknowledgement of an alarm confirms that it has been noted.
AG
PLC of the SIMATIC S5 series such as the AG S5-115U, for example
Alarm logging
Output of user-specific alarms to a printer, in parallel to their output to the HMI device
screen.
Alarm, acknowledging
Acknowledgement of an alarm confirms that it has been noted.
Alarm, activated
Moment at which an alarm is triggered by the PLC or HMI device.
Alarm, deactivated
Moment at which the initiation of an alarm is reset by the PLC.
Alarm, user-specific
A user-specific alarm can be assigned to one of the following alarm classes:
Error
Operation
User-specific alarm classes
A user-specific alarm designates a certain operating status of the plant connected to the HMI
device via the PLC.
Glossary
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Glossary-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
array
Area reserved in configured screens for the input and output of values.
AS
PLC of the SIMATIC S7 series such as a SIMATIC S7-300
AS 511
Protocol of the programming device interface of a SIMATIC S5 PLC
Bootloader
Used to start the operating system. Automatically started when the HMI device is switched
on. A start screen appears during startup. After the operating system has been loaded, the
Loader opens.
Bootstrapping
Function called when updating the operating system. When a functional operating system is
available, updates can be performed without bootstrapping. Otherwise, updating with
bootstrapping is necessary. In this case, the configuration computer communicates with the
HMI device by means of the HMI device bootloader.
Configuration computer
General term for programming devices (PGs) and PCs on which plant projects are created
using an engineering software.
Control request
Triggers a function via the PLC.
Controller
General term for devices and systems with which the HMI device communicates, e.g.
SIMATIC S7.
Display duration
Defines whether and how long a system alarm is displayed on the HMI device.
EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility is the ability of electrical equipment to function properly in its
electromagnetic environment without influencing this environment.
Glossary
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 Glossary-3
Engineering software
Software for the creation of projects for process visualization – see also project, process
visualization and runtime software
Event
Functions are triggered by defined incoming events. Events can be configured. Events which
can be assigned to a button include "Press" and "Release", for example.
Fault time
Refers to the time interval between an activated and deactivated alarm.
Figure
Form of the visualization of all logically related process data for a plant. The visualization of
the process data can be supported by graphic objects.
Flash memory
Non-volatile memory with EEPROM chips, used as mobile storage medium or as memory
module installed permanently on the motherboard.
Half Brightness Life Time
Time period until the brightness degrades to 50% of its original value. The specified value is
dependent on the operating temperature.
Hardcopy
Output of the screen content to a printer.
HMI device image
File which can be transferred from the programming device to the HMI device. The HMI
device image contains the operating system and elements of the runtime software required
to run a project.
Infotext
Configured information on objects within a project. An alarm infotext, for example, may
contain information on the cause of the fault and troubleshooting routines.
IO field
Enables the input or output of values on the HMI device which are transferred to the PLC.
Glossary
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Glossary-4 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Notation
System consisting of characters, symbols and rules. In particular used to define the write
format of a programming language in data processing.
Object
Component of a project. Example: screen or alarm. Objects are used to view or enter texts
and values on the HMI device.
Operator control object
Component of a project which is used to enter values and trigger functions. A button, for
example, is an operator control object.
Plant
General term referring to machines, processing centers, systems, plants and processes
which are operated and monitored on an HMI device.
Process visualization
Visualization of processes from the areas of production, logistics and services in text-based
and graphics format. Configured plant screens allow operator intervention in active plant
processes by means of the input and output data.
project
Result of a configuration using an engineering software. The project normally contains
several screens with embedded system-specific objects, basic settings and alarms. The
project file of a project configured in WinCC flexible is saved under the file name extension
*.hmi.
You distinguish between the project on the configuration computer and that on an HMI
device. A project may be available in more languages on the configuration computer than
can be managed on the HMI device. The project on the configuration computer can also be
set up for different HMI devices. Only the project set up for a particular HMI device can be
transferred to that HMI device.
Project file
File which is generated based on a source file for a specific HMI device when the
configuration is completed. The project file is transferred to the corresponding HMI device
and is used to operate and monitor plants. Refer to Source file.
Recipe
Combination of tags forming a fixed data structure. The data structure configured can be
assigned data on the HMI device and is then referred to as a data record. The use of recipes
ensures that when a data record is downloaded, all the assigned data is transferred
synchronously to the PLC.
Glossary
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 Glossary-5
Runtime software
Process visualization software which can be used to debug a project on a configuration
computer. Also refer to "Project" and "Engineering software".
Screen object
Configured object for operating and monitoring the system, e.g. a rectangle, an IO field or a
recipe view.
Softkey
Key on the HMI device which supports user-specific functions. A function is assigned to the
key in the configuration. The assignment of the keys may be specific to an active screen or
not.
Source file
File from which various project files can be created, depending on the configuration. The
source file is not transferred and remains on the configuration computer.
The file name extension of a source file is *.hmi. Refer to Source file, compressed and
Project file.
Source file, compressed
Compressed form of the source file. Can be transferred in addition to the project file to the
corresponding HMI device. "Enable Upload" must be set in the project on the configuration
computer. The file extension of a compressed source file is *.pdz. The standard memory
location for a compressed source file is the external MMC. Refer to Source file.
To restore a source file, it is necessary to use the same WinCC flexible version which was
used to configure the project.
STEP 7
Programming software SIMATIC S7, SIMATIC C7 and SIMATIC WinAC PLCs.
STEP 7 Micro/WIN
Programming software for PLCs of the SIMATIC S7-200 series.
Symbolic IO field
Box for the input/output of a parameter. Contains a list of default entries from which one can
be selected.
System alarms
Assigned to the "System" alarm class. A system alarm refers to internal states on the HMI
device and the PLC.
Glossary
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Glossary-6 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Tab order
In the configuration, this sets the sequence in which objects are focused on pressing the
<TAB> key.
Tag
Defined memory location to which values can be written to and read from. This can be done
from the PLC or the HMI device. Based on whether the tag is interconnected with the PLC or
not, we distinguish between "external" tags (process tags) and "internal" tags.
Transfer
The transfer of an executable project to the HMI device.
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 Index-1
Index
A
Accumulator
Optional, 1-17
Acknowledging
Alarm, 9-5
Error alarm, 9-5
Address assignment
in the TCP/IP network, 6-37
Admin, 8-27, 8-29
Alarm, 9-1
Acknowledging, 9-5
Editing, 9-6
Alarm buffer, 1-18, 9-2
Alarm class, 9-2, 9-4
Alarm event, 9-1
Alarm indicator, 9-4
Alarm line, 9-2
Alarm view, 9-2
Alarm window, 9-2
Alarms, 1-18
Displaying, 9-2
Alphanumerical screen keyboard, 8-8, 8-9
Alphanumerical values, 8-7
Changing, 8-10
Entering, 8-10
Appearance
Slider control, 8-13
Application
Handwheel, A-13
Illuminated pushbutton, A-12
Key-operated switch, A-13
LED of the softkeys, A-8
Applications
In industry, 2-6
Approvals, 2-3
Automatic production sequence, 10-21
Automatic transfer, 7-6
Automation License Manager, 7-20
B
Backing up, 7-4, 7-9, 7-10, 7-12
About ProSave, 7-12
About Wincc flexible, 7-10
Backup
to memory card, 6-10
Bootstrapping, 7-4, 7-14
Box ID, A-1
Byte assignment, A-5
C
Cable cross section, 4-18
Calibrating
Touch screen, 6-18
Climatic
Storage conditions, 2-11
Transport conditions, 2-11
Commissioning
HMI device, 7-2
Communications Properties, 6-35
Compatibility, 1-13
Computer name
For network operation, 6-35
Configuration computer
Connecting to the terminal box, 4-11
Configuration phase, 7-1
Configuring
Data channel, 6-31
Interfaces, 4-14
Network, 6-33
Operating system, 6-1
Configuring the network
General procedure, 6-34
Connect a printer.
Connection configurator, 4-17
Index
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Index-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Connecting
Configuration computer, 4-11, 4-24
Connecting cables, 4-19
Connection sequence, 4-4
Controller, 4-16
Equipotential bonding, 4-10
Terminal box, 4-4
Connecting the configuration computer
Connection configurator, 4-24
Connecting the connecting cable, 4-19
Connecting the PLC
Wiring diagram, 4-16
Connection
Electrical, 4-3
Connection configurator
Configuration computer, 4-11, 4-24
MPI/PROFIBUS DP, 4-11
Printer, 4-17
Connection examples, 12-18
For safety category 3: enabling switch, 12-19,
12-20
For safety category 3: STOP button, 12-21
Connection point recognition, 1-13, A-1
Connection sequence, 4-4
Connections
Number, 1-20
Contrast
Changing, 6-16
Control Panel, 6-3
MPI/DP settings, 6-25
opening, 6-3
Password protection, 6-2
Controller
Configuring the interface, 4-14
Controllers
Number, 1-20
D
Data channel
Configuring, 6-31
Enabling, 6-31
Locking, 6-31
Data set
Reading, 10-17
Date and time
Entering, 8-11
Date and time of day, 8-7
Synchronizing, 6-14
Decimal places, 8-7
Default gateway, 6-38
Design, 1-8
Wall holder, 1-16
DHCP, 6-38
Direct connection, 6-36
Direct keys, A-4
Display, 12-6
DNS, 6-38
DNS server, 6-34
Domain
Logon, 6-39
E
EC declaration of conformity, 2-2
Electrical connections, 4-3
Electrical installation, 4-3
Electrostatic charge, A-14
Enable switch, 2-7, 5-3
Normal activation, 5-4
Panic activation, 5-4
Switch settings, 5-4
Enabling equipment, 2-7
Entering
Alphanumerical values, 8-7, 8-10
Date and time, 8-11
Date and time of day, 8-7
Numerical values, 8-6, 8-8
Symbolic values, 8-7, 8-11
Entering a Recipe Record, 10-19
Equipotential bonding
Connecting, 4-10
Requirements, 4-10
Equipotential bonding cable, 4-11
Error alarm
Acknowledging, 9-5
F
Fast connector
Assignment, 12-13, 12-16
Feedback
Optical, 8-2
File
Backing up, 6-16
Forcing
Permissions in remote operation, 8-19
Format patterns, 8-6
Front view, 1-9
Function
Additional, 1-19
Function test, 4-26
Index
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 Index-3
Functional scope
Additional, 1-19
Alarm, 1-18
Alarm buffer, 1-18
Infotext, 1-19
Limit-value monitoring, 1-18
Recipe, 1-19
scaling, 1-18
Screen, 1-19
Tag, 1-18
Text List, 1-18
G
Gauge, 8-17
H
Hand wheel, 5-11
Handwheel
Application, A-13
Evaluation of incremental values, A-13
High frequency radiation, 2-2
HMI device, 12-6, 12-7, 12-8
Commissioning, 7-2
EMC-compliant installation, 2-9
Front view, 1-9
Holding, 5-14
Interfaces, 4-23
Mounting position, 3-4, 4-1
Placing, 5-14
Recommissioning, 7-2
Side view, 1-10
Switch off, 4-26
Switching on, 4-25
Testing, 4-25
HMI device image, 6-17
I
IF1 interface
Assignment, 12-12, 12-16
Illuminated pushbutton, 5-13
Application, A-12
Bit assignment, A-12
Infotext, 1-19
Displaying, 8-14, 9-4
Input on the HMI device
Using operator controls, 8-1
Using soft keys, 8-3
Input unit, 12-6
Installation
Configuration computer, 4-11
Electrical, 4-3
EMC-compliant, 2-9
Installing
option, 7-17, 7-19
Instructions
General, 2-6
Safety, 2-2
Interfaces, 4-6, 4-7, 4-11, 4-23
Configuring, 4-14
Interference
Pulse-shaped, 2-9
Sinusoidal, 2-10
Interlocking mechanism, 4-19
Internet settings, 6-40
K
Keyboard properties, 6-8
Key-operated switch, 5-12
Application, A-13
Bit assignment, A-13
L
Labels
Approvals, 2-3
EC declaration of conformity, 2-2
Language
Setting, 8-5
LED display, 5-16
LED softkey
Bit assignment, A-8
LED softkeys, A-8
License key, 7-20
Transferring, 7-21
Transferring back, 7-22
Limit value test, 8-7
Limits
For password, 8-24
For User view, 8-24
For users, 8-24
Loader, 6-1
Logoff
User, 8-25
Logoff time, 8-22
Logon
Users, 8-24
Logon information
in the TCP/IP network, 6-39
Index
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Index-4 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
M
MAC address, 6-37
Maintenance, 11-1
Manual production sequence, 10-20
Manual transfer, 7-5
Mechanical
Storage conditions, 2-11
Transport conditions, 2-11
Memory, 12-6
Memory card, 1-16
Backup to, 6-10
Restoring from, 6-10
Mobile Panel 177
Enable switch, 5-3
Operator control elements, 5-1
STOP button, 5-5
Monitoring device
ELAN SRB-NA-R-C.27/S, 12-19
PILZ PST1, 12-20
SIGUARD 3TK2840, 12-21
Monitoring mode
Sm@rtClient view, 8-18
Mounting position, 4-1
HMI device, 3-4
Mouse properties, 6-9
MPI/DP settings, 6-25
Multi-key operation, 8-3
MultiMediaCard, 1-16
N
Name server, 6-38
Network settings, 6-37
Nominal voltage, 3-6
Numerical screen keyboard, 8-7
Numerical values
Changing, 8-8
Decimal places, 8-7
Entering, 8-6, 8-8
Formats, 8-6
Limit value test, 8-7
O
Offices, iv
Offline, 7-2
Offline test, 7-8
Online, 7-2
Online test, 7-8
OP properties, 6-17, 6-18, 6-28
Opening the terminal box, 4-5
Operating mode
Offline, 7-2
Online, 7-2
Overview, 7-2
Switching, 7-2
Transfer, 4-25, 7-3
Operating recipes
Read recipe data record, 10-17
Operating safety
Standards, 2-5
Operating system
Configuring, 6-1
Updating, 7-4, 7-14
Operation, 5-14
Enable switch, 5-3
General, 5-14
Hand wheel, 5-11
Illuminated pushbutton, 5-13
Key-operated switch, 5-12
STOP button, 5-5
Operation feedback, 8-1
Operator control elements, 5-1, 5-2
Optical feedback, 8-2
option, 7-17
Installing, 7-17, 7-19
Removing, 7-18, 7-19
Optional Accumulator Package, 1-17
Overall dimensions
Mobile Panel 177, 12-1, 12-2
P
Panic activation, 5-4
Password
Deleting, 6-21
Entering, 6-20
Password, 8-23
Backing up, 8-23
Restoring, 8-23
Password list, 8-23
Password properties, 6-20
Password protection, 6-2
PC
Connecting, 4-11
PC connection, 6-36
Permission, 8-22
Pin assignment
Female header, 12-10, 12-11
RJ45 plug connector, 12-9
RJ45 plug connector, 12-11
RS 485 interface, 12-9, 12-10
PLC_User, 8-27, 8-29
Index
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 Index-5
PLCs from other manufacturers
Protocols, 1-21
Polarity reversal protection, 4-17
Potential differences, 4-10
Power supply
Cable cross section, 4-18
Wiring diagram, 4-18
Printing
via a network printer, 6-34
Process control phase, 7-1
Production sequence
Automatic, 10-21
Manual, 10-20
PROFINET, 6-33
Project
Closing, 8-31
Operating, 8-1
Testing, 7-7
Testing offline, 7-8
Testing online, 7-8
Transferring, 7-2
Protective cover, 4-5
Protective film, 1-17
Protective sleeve, 1-17
Protocol
PLCs from other manufacturers, 1-21
SIMATIC PLCs, 1-20
Proxy server, 6-40
R
Radiation
High frequency, 2-2
Recipe, 1-19
Recipe screen, 10-4
Recipe view, 10-4
Recipe screen, 10-7
Overview, 10-7
Recipe view, 10-5
Advanced view, 10-5
Simple view, 10-6
Recommissioning
HMI device, 7-2
Recovery time, 1-13, 4-26, 8-31, 12-7, 12-8
Regional settings
Changing, 6-23
Registry information
Backing up, 6-16
Remote control
Forcing permission, 8-19
Removing
option, 7-18, 7-19
Representatives, iv
Response time
Handwheel, A-7
Restore
from memory card, 6-10
Restoring, 7-4, 7-9, 7-11, 7-13
About ProSave, 7-13
About WinCC flexible, 7-11
In the case of compatibility conflict, 7-9
Risk analysis, 2-6
Ruler, 8-20
S
Safety
Operating safety, 2-5
STOP button, 5-7
Voltage supply, 2-6
Safety category 3
Connection examples, 12-18
Safety information
Enable switch, 2-7
High frequency radiation, 2-2
STOP button, 2-8
Safety regulations, 2-1
Scope of maintenance, 11-1
Screen, 1-19
Screen keyboard, 8-6
Alphanumerical, 8-9
Keyboard levels, 8-9
Numerical, 8-7, 8-10
Setting the character repeat, 6-8
Screen keyboard
Outside an open project, 6-5
Screen saver
Setting, 6-28
Screen settings
Changing, 6-16
Security, 2-1, 8-22
Safety regulations, 2-1
Security system, 8-22
Selection list, 8-11
Service, 11-2
On the Internet, v
Service pack, 11-2
Setting
Date, 6-13
Time, 6-13
Setting the box ID, 4-9
Setting the date, 6-13
Setting the delay, 6-28
Setting the double-click, 6-9
Setting the station number, 4-9
Setting the time, 6-13
Index
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Index-6 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0
Setting the time zone, 6-13
Side view, 1-10
SIMATIC PLC
Protocols, 1-20
Simple recipe view, 10-6
Slider control, 8-13
Appearance, 8-13
Sm@rtClient view, 8-18
Application, 8-18
Monitoring mode, 8-18
SMTP server, 6-40
Soft keys
Global function assignment, 8-3
Local function assignment, 8-3
Standards, 2-5, 2-6
Starting
HMI device, 6-17
Status force, 8-15
Operator controls, 8-16
Status force display, 8-15
STOP button, 2-8, 5-5, 5-7
Storage conditions, 2-11
Storage directory, 6-27
Stripping insulation
MPI/PROFIBUS-DP cable, 4-9
PROFINET cables, 4-9
Subnet mask, 6-38
Support
On the Internet, v
Switch off
HMI device, 4-26
Switching on
HMI device, 4-25
Symbolic values, 8-7
Changing, 8-11
Entering, 8-11
Synchronizing, 6-14
System, 6-29
System alarms
Parameter, A-16
System functions, A-4
System information
Displaying, 6-29
T
Tags, limit value monitoring, scaling, text list, 1-18
TCP/IP address, 6-37
Technical data
Female header, 12-10, 12-11
RJ45 plug connector, 12-9
RJ45 plug connector, 12-11
Technical specifications
Display, 12-6
HMI device, 12-6, 12-7, 12-8
Input unit, 12-6
Memory, 12-6
Overall dimensions, 12-1, 12-2
RS 485 interface, 12-9, 12-10
Voltage supply, 12-7, 12-8
Technical support, iv
Technical Support, 6-17
Terminal box
Connecting, 4-4
DIL switch, 4-14
Fast connector, 12-16
IF1 interface, 12-16
Interfaces, 4-6, 4-7
Terminal strip 1, 12-16
Terminal strip 2, 12-17
Variants, 1-13
Terminal Box DP
Fast connector, 12-13
IF1 interface, 12-12
Terminal strip 1, 12-12
Terminal strip 2, 12-14
Terminal Box PN
LED display, 5-16
Testing
HMI device, 4-25
Project, 7-7
Time
Entering, 8-11
Touch screen
Calibrating, 6-18
Note, 5-2
Trademarks, iv
Training center, iv
Transfer, 7-3, 7-4
Automatic, 7-6
Cancel, 4-25
Manual, 7-5
Transfer mode
Unintentional, 6-32
Transfer settings, 6-33
Transferring
License key, 7-21
Project, 7-2
Transferring back
License key, 7-22
Transport conditions, 2-11
Trend view, 8-20
Value table, 8-20
Trends
Limit violation, 8-20
Trends, 8-20
Index
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0 Index-7
U
Unintentional Transfer Mode, 6-32
Upkeep, 11-1
Use
Conditions, 3-1
In residential areas, 2-6
With additional measures, 3-1
User
Logoff, 8-25
User data
Backing up, 8-23
Restoring, 8-23
User group, 8-22
User view, 8-23
Users, 8-22
Admin, 8-27, 8-29
Creating, 8-26
Deleting, 8-29
Logon, 8-24
PLC_User, 8-27, 8-29
V
Value table, 8-20
Voltage supply, 2-6, 12-7, 12-8
W
WinCC flexible internet settings, 6-40
Windows CE taskbar, 6-2
Password protection, 6-2
WINS server, 6-34
Wiring diagram
Connecting the PLC, 4-16
Connecting the Power Supply, 4-18
Index
Mobile Panel 177 (WinCC flexible)
Index-8 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, 6AV6691-1DK01-0AB0